Home

Manual - JB CNC & Linear Components

1. EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes Value Function Description 3 imental Se 36 This time running time If the current running time of frequency inverter exceeds the value of reached b2 31 the terminal becomes ON 37 Accumulative power on If the frequency inverter accumulative power on time b9 08 exceeds time reached the value set in b2 20 the terminal becomes ON 38 Accumulative running If the accumulative running time of the frequency inverter exceeds the time reached time set in b2 21 the terminal becomes ON Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b4 10 FMR ON delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s b4 11 FMR OFF delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s b4 12 Relay 1 ON delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s b4 13 Relay 1 OFF delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s b4 14 Reserved b4 15 Reserved b4 16 DO1 ON delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s b4 17 DO1 OFF delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s b4 18 DO2 ON delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s b4 19 DO2 OFF delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s These parameters are used to set the delay time of output terminals FMR relay DO1 DO2 and DO3 from status change to actual output Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit FMR valid mode 0 Positive logic 1 Negative logic Ten s digit Relay 1 valid mode 0 1 same as FMR b4 20 DO logic selection 1 Hundred s digit Relay 2 valid mode 00000 0 1 same as FMR Thousand s digit DO1 valid mode
2. Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 08 DO state 0 1023 It indicates the present state of DO terminals After the value is converted into a binary number each bit corresponds to a DO terminal 1 indicates high level signal and 0 indicates low level signal The corresponding relationship between bits and DOx is described in the following table Table 6 15 Corresponding relationship between bits and DOs Bit Bitl Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 DO3 Relay 1 Relay 2 DO1 DO2 VDO Bit6 Bit7 Bit8 Bit9 Bitl10 Bitl1 VDO2 VDO3 VDO4 VDO5 Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 14 Load speed display 0 65535 For more details see the description of b9 06 Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 15 PID setting 0 65535 U0 16 PID feedback 0 65535 They display the PID setting value and PID feedback value PID setting PID setting percentage xC0 05 PID feedback PID feedback percentage x C0 05 Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 18 Input pulse frequency 0 00kHz 100 00 kHz It displays the high speed pulse sampled frequency of DI6 in minimum unit of 0 01 kHz Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 19 Feedback speed _ 3000 0Hz 3000 0 Hz unit 0 01Hz 300 00Hz 300 00 Hz It displays the actual output frequency of the frequency inverter 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s M
3. gt 3 5Byte 1Byte 1Byte 2Byte 2nByte 2Byte Slave writes Free Target Read the Function code Nuhe CRC command frame Start frame station command address function correction and address 0x03 H L code 2n H _ Calculate CRC correction i gt 3 5Byte 1Byte 1Byte 2Byte 1Byte 2Byte l Master reads Free Target Read the Function code aes CRC command frame 2 station command address correction and Start ame address 0x06 L aaa H L Me Calculate CRC correction 1Byte 1Byte 2Byte 1Byte 2Byte Slave writes Free Target Read ae F moor code Nuber CRC command frame Start frame station comman address ti orrectionand address 0x06 H L pa B I Se Calculate CRC correction If the wrong communication frame was detected by the salve or other reasons caused the failure of reading and writing the wrong frame will be replied gt 3 5Byte 1Byte 1Byte 1Byte 2Byte i Slave reads and Free Target Read the CRC replies error frame Start frame station command Error type correction and address 0x83 H L Ne ___ Calculate CRC correction gt 3 5Byte 1Byte 1Byte 1Byte 2Byte Slave writes and Free Target Read the CRC replies error frame Start frame station command Error type correction and Free address 0x83 H SS ___ Ca
4. Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit Mot load Err11 bb 28 Overvoltage 200 0 2500 0 V 830 0 V nit s digit Motor overload Err threshold 0 Free stop It is used to set the overvoltage threshold of the frequency inverter The default values of different voltage 1 Stop according to the stop mode classes are listed in the following table 2 Continue to run f T Default Overvoltage sees s digit ma a phase loss Err12 oltage Class ault protection ame as unit s digi bb 32 Threshold action selection 1 Hundred s digit Power output phase loss Err13 90090 Single phase 220 V 400 0 V Same as unit s digit Three phase 220 V 400 0 V Thousand s digit External equipment fault Err15 Three phase 380 V 830 0 V Same as unit s digit Three phase 480 V 890 0 V Ten thousand s digit Communication fault Err16 Three phase 690 V 1300 0 V Same as UME digit Note The default value is also the upper limit of the frequency inverter s internal overvoltage protection Ja pa Encoder PG card fault Err20 o 5 i yr Free stop voltage The parameter becomes effective only when the setting of bb 28 is lower than the default value If Ten s digit EEPROM read write fault Err21 the setting is higher than the default value use the default value i 0 Free stop bb 33 Fault protection 1 Stop according to the stop mode 00000 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default action select
5. b1 05 0 100 0 b1 06 0 0s 100 0s 0 0s 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual 47 Startup DC braking is generally used during restart of the frequency inverter after the rotating motor stops Pre excitation is used to make the frequency inverter build magnetic field for the asynchronous motor before startup to improve the responsiveness Startup DC braking is valid only for direct start b1 00 0 In this case the frequency inverter performs DC braking at the setting startup DC braking current After the startup DC braking time the frequency inverter starts to run If the startup DC braking time is 0 the frequency inverter starts directly without DC braking The larger the startup DC braking current is the larger the braking force is If the startup mode is pre excited start b1 00 3 the frequency inverter firstly builds magnetic field based on the set pre excited current After the pre excited time the frequency inverter starts to run If the pre excited time is 0 the frequency inverter starts directly without pre excitation The startup DC braking current or pre excited current is a percentage of motor rated current Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Decelerate to stoj b1 07 Stop mode A 0 1 free stop 0 Decelerate to stop After the stop command is enabled the frequency inverter decreases the output frequency according to the dec
6. Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Pulse output FMP 4 00 FM te l t mod 1 9 eupina oupi more 1 Switch signal output FMR The FM terminal is programmable multiplexing terminal It can be used for high speed pulse output FMP with maximum frequency of 100 kHz Refer to b6 00 for relevant functions of FMP It can also be used as open collector switch signal output FMR Code Parameter Name Default b4 01 FMR function open collector output terminal 0 b4 02 Relay 1 function TA TB TC b4 03 Reserved b4 04 DO1 function selection open collector output terminal 1 b4 05 DO2 function extend 0 b4 06 DO3 function extend 0 b4 07 DO4 function extend 0 b4 08 DOS function extend 0 b4 09 DO6 function extend 0 These nine parameters are used to select the functions of the nine digital output terminals TA TB TC and P A P B P C are respectively the relays on the control board and the extension card The functions of the output terminals are described in the following table Value Function Description 0 No output The terminal has no function If the frequency inverter main circuit and control circuit become 1 Ready for RUN stable and the frequency inverter detects no fault and is ready for RUN the terminal becomes ON 2 Frequency inverter When the frequency inverter is running and has output frequency can runnin
7. EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default fourth point input value of AT1 Corresponding setting of bS 15 AIL input maximum value 0 00 V 10 00 V 10 00 V b5 23 second point input value of 100 00 100 0 25 0 Corresponding setting of AII 5 6 6 A pais maximum input Lae Ne 100 9 b5 24 Third point input value of AI2 0 00 V 10 00 V 5 00V bS 17 Allinput filter time 0 00s 10 00s 0 10s 65 25 Corresponding setting of third 100 00 100 0 50 0 These parameters are used to define the relationship between the analog input voltage and the corresponding point input value of A12 setting value 65 26 Fourth point input value of 0 00 V 10 00 V 7 50V When the analog input is current input 1 mA current corresponds to 0 5 Volts Al2 A 5 27 _ Corresponding setting of _199 00 100 0 75 0 r k fourth point input value of AI2 Corresponding setting of maximum input b5 28 AI2 maximum input 0 00V 10 00 V 10 00 V ps 29 Corresponding setting of AI2 149 9 9 100 0 100 0 Corresponding setting maximum input of fourth point input Un b5 30 AI2 input filter time 0 00s 10 00s 0 10s 5 31 ump point of AT2 input _190 0 100 0 0 0 corresponding setting J litude of AI2 input Corresponding setting b5 32 Stee i gt ey 0 0 100 0 0 5 of third point input corresponding setting b5 33 AI3 minimum i
8. Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property Group b0 Basic Function Parameters b0 00 Motor type selection Unit s digit Motor 1 selection Ten s digit Motor 2 selection 0 AC asynchronous motor 1 Permanent magnetic synchronous motor 00 o b0 01 Motor control mode Unit s digit Motor 1 control mode selection Ten s digit Motor 2 control mode selection 0 Sensor less vector control SVC 1 Closed loop vector control VC 2 V F control Hundred s digit Thousand s digit reserved Ten thousand s digit Motor selection 0 Motor 1 1 Motor 2 00000 o b0 02 Command source selection 0 Keypad control LED off 1 Terminal control LED on 2 Communication control LED blinking b0 03 Main frequency source X selection 0 Digital setting Preset frequency b0 12 UP DOWN modifiable no record after power off 1 Digital setting Preset frequency b0 12 UP DOWN modifiable record after power off 2 All 3 AI2 4 AI3 5 Pulse setting DI6 6 Multi function 7 Built in PLC 8 PID 9 Communication setting Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property b0 04 Auxiliary frequency source Y selection The same as b0 03 Main frequency source X selection 1 o b0 05 Selection of auxiliary frequency Y range 0 Relative to maximum frequency 1 Relative to main frequency X o
9. 0 0s h Acceleration deceleration C2 09 time of simple PLC Segment 3 0 3 Running time of simple PLC Segment 4 C2 10 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h Acceleration deceleration C2 11 time of simple PLC Segment 4 0 3 Running time of simple PLC Segment 5 C2 12 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h Acceleration deceleration C2 13 time of simple PLC Segment 5 0 3 Running time of simple 2 14 E PLC Segment 6 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h Acceleration deceleration C2 15 time of simple PLC Segment 6 0 3 Running time of simple C2 16 PLC Segment 7 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h Acceleration deceleration C2 17 time of simple PLC Segment 7 0 3 Running time of simple C2 18 PLC Segment 8 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h Acceleration deceleration C2 19 time of simple PLC Segment 8 0 3 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default C2 02 Running time of simple PLC Segment 0 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h Running time of simple PLC Segment 9 C2 20 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h C2 03 Acceleration deceleration time of simple PLC Segment 0 0 3 Acceleration deceleration C2 21 time of simple PLC Segment 9 0 3 C2 04 Running time of simple PLC Segment 1 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h Running time of simple PLC Segment 10 C2 22 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h C2 05 Acceleration decele
10. 35 Motor selection terminal 1 Switchover among the two groups of motor parameters can be implemented through this terminal Motor selection terminal 2 36 Reserved Reserved The terminal is used for fault reset function the same as the 37 Fault reset RESET function of RESET key on the operation panel Remote fault reset is implemented by this function If this terminal becomes ON the frequency inverter reports 38 Normally ape ANG input of Err15 and performs the fault protection action For more details external fault Ser see the description of bb 32 After this terminal becomes ON the frequency inverter reports 39 Noimally closed NC input of Err15 and performs the fault protection action For more details external fault me see the description of bb 32 40 _ User defined fault 1 If these two terminals become ON the frequency inverter reports Err27 and Err28 respectively and performs fault Bae suck fault 2 protection actions based on the ae in bb 34 i The frequency inverter decelerates to stop but the running arameters are all memorized such as PLC swing frequenc 12 RUN pause and PID parameters After this function is disabled the frequency inverter restore to its status before stop The frequency inverter blocks its output the motor free stop and 43 Free stop is not controlled by the frequency inverter It is the same as free stop described in b1 07 When this terminal becomes ON the frequency inverter stops within th
11. Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property 1 All 2 AI2 3 AI3 4 Pulse setting DI6 5 PID 6 Set by preset frequency b0 12 modified via terminal UP DOWN Group C2 Simple PLC 0 Stop after the Frequency inverter runs one cycle C2 00 Simple PLC running 1 Keep final values after the frequency 0 T mode inverter runs one cycle 2 Repeat after the frequency inverter runs one cycle Unit s digit Record of power failure 0 no record after power off c2 01 Simple re record 1 record aner power off i 00 T selection Ten s digit Record of stopping 0 no record after stopping l record after stopping C2 02 a a 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h O Acceleration deceleratio C2 03 ntime of simple PLC 0 3 0 i Segment 0 C2 04 D T le Io os h 6553 5s h 0 0s h 0 Acceleration deceleratio C2 05 n time of simple PLC 0 3 0 o Segment 1 C2 06 no Sad le Io os h 6553 5s h 0 0s h qo Acceleration deceleratio C2 07 ntime of simple PLC 0 3 0 o0 Segment 2 C2 08 mie mea 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h 0 Acceleration deceleratio C2 09 ntime of simple PLC 0 3 0 a Segment 3 C2 10 ee peng le Io Os h 6553 5s h 0 0s h 0 Acceleration deceleratio C2 11 n time of simple PLC 0 3 0 a Segment 4 C2 12 eed le Io os h 6553 5s h 0 0s h 0 66 EM11 User s Manual Appendix II Appendix II EM11 User s Manual Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property C2 13 Acceleration deceleratio n
12. b2 03 Acceleration time 2 0 0s 6500 0s a dependent Model b2 04 Deceleration time 2 0 0s 6500 0s oe dependent a Model Z b2 05 Acceleration time 3 0 0s 6500 0s ar 0 dependent Model r b2 06 Deceleration time 3 0 0s 6500 0s ape 0 dependent Model 5 b2 07 Acceleration time 4 0 0s 6500 0s cae 0 dependent Model b2 08 Deceleration time 4 0 0s 6500 0s has dependent b2 09 Jump frequency 1 0 00 Hz maximum frequency 0 00 Hz 0 b2 10 Jump frequency2 0 00 Hz maximum frequency 0 00 Hz 0 b2 11 Frequency jump 0 00 Hz maximum frequency 0 00Hz amplitude Jump frequency during 0 Disabled b2 12 acceleration PRY 0 00Hz o 1 Enabled deceleration 146 EM11 User s Manual Appendix II Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property Frequency switchover int bet b2 13 pom i baa 0 00 Hz maximum frequency 0 00 Hz 0 acceleration time 1 and acceleration time 2 Frequency switchover int bet b2 14 ee s wep 0 00 maximum frequency 0 00 Hz 0 deceleration time 1 and deceleration time 2 0 Enabled E b2 15 Reverse running 1 Disabled 0 0 p216 Forward Reverse 19 4 3000 08 0 0s a rotation dead zone time S Running mode when set 0 Run at frequency lower limit b2 17 frequency lower than 1 Stop 0 0 frequency lower limit 2 Run at zero speed b2 18 Droop control 0 00Hz 10 00 Hz 0 00 Hz 0 0 Disabled _ b2 19 Terminal JOG pr
13. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C0 20 PID differential limit 0 00 100 00 0 10 It is used to set the PID differential output range In PID control the differential operation may easily cause system oscillation Thus the PID differential regulation is restricted to a small range Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default C0 21 Maximum positive deviation between two PID outputs 0 00 100 00 1 00 C0 22 Maximum negative deviation between two PID outputs 0 00 100 00 1 00 This function is used to limit the deviation between two PID outputs 2 ms per PID output to suppress the rapid change of PID output and stabilize the running of the frequency inverter 93 94 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes C0 21 and C0 22 respectively are corresponding to the maximum absolute value of the output deviation in forward direction and in reverse direction 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default co 23 PID feedback filter o o9 60 00s 0 00s time C0 24 _ PID output filter time 0 00s 60 00s 0 00s C0 23 is used to filter the PID feedback helping to reduce interference on the feedback but slowing the response of the process closed loop system C0 24 is used to filter the PID output frequency helping to weak
14. The EM11 models that provide this function are listed in the following table Voltage Class Models Single phase 220 V None Three phase 220 V From 11 kW G model Three phase 380 V From 18 5 kW G model Three phase 690 V From 18 5 kW G model 83 For every voltage class the EM11 frequency inverters provide function of input phase loss or contactor energizing protection for above model The EM11 Frequency inverters do not have this function below the power listed in the table no matter whether bb 12 is set to 0 or 1 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default bb 13 Output phase loss 0 Disabled A protection 1 Enabled It is used to determine whether to perform output phase loss protection Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default bb 14 Off load protecti ee 0 Da tac 1 Enabled bb 15 OF p oe 0 0 100 0 rated motor current 1 0 eve pije OR load detection o esas 1 0 time If off load protection is enabled when the output current of the frequency inverter is lower than the detection level bb 15 and the duration time exceeds the detection time bb 16 the output frequency of frequency inverter automatically declines to 7 of the rated frequency During the protection the frequency inverter automatically accelerates to the set frequency if the load restore to normal Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default bb 17 o detection 5 0 4 50
15. When the output side of the inverter is connected with output filter the conduction and radiation interference can be reduced Output AC reactor Between the output side of frequency inverter and motor near the frequency inverter When the cable connecting the inverter and the motor is longer than 100meters it is suggested to install AC output reactor to suppress the high frequency oscillation to avoid the damage to motor insulation large leakage current and frequent inverter protective action 20 EM11 User s Manual 3 Installation of Frequency Inverter 3 5 Model Selection of Main Circuit Peripheral Devices Table 3 2 Model Selection Diagram of Main Circuit Peripheral Devices Recommended Frequency inverter MCCB Contactor Cable a ye pi ee aes ae be 5 Model A A Main ie Side Main ee Control grai mm mm mm Single phase 220V EM11 G1 d75 16 10 2 5 25 1 0 EM11 G1 1d5 20 16 4 0 2 5 1 0 EM11 G1 2d2 32 20 6 0 4 0 1 0 Three phase 220V EM11 G2 d75 16 10 2 5 2 5 1 0 EM11 G2 1d5 16 10 2 5 2 5 1 0 EM11 G2 2d2 25 16 4 0 4 0 1 0 EM11 G2 004 32 25 4 0 4 0 1 0 EM11 G2 5d5 63 40 4 0 4 0 1 0 EM11 G2 7d5 63 40 6 0 6 0 0 EM11 G2 011 100 63 10 10 0 EM11 G2 015 125 100 16 10 1 0 EM11 G2 018 160 100 16 16 1 0 EM11 G2 022 200 125 25 25 0 EM11 G2 030 200 125 35 25 0 EM1
16. 0 0 voltage 1 V1 2 05 Multi point V 4203 to 89807 0 00 Hz frequency 2 F2 Multi point V F d2 06 0 0 100 09 0 0 voltage 2 V2 fi 4 4 Multi point V F d2 07 05 5 frequency 3 F3 d2 05 maximum frequency 0 00 Hz Multi point V F d2 08 0 0 100 09 0 07 voltage 3 V3 4 A 11 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual When d2 00 set to 1 these six parameters are used to define the multi point V F curve The multi point V F curve is set based on the motor s load characteristic The relationship between voltages and frequencies is V1 lt V2 lt V3 F1 lt F2 lt F3 Diagram 6 32 shows the setting of multi point V F curve At low frequency higher voltage may cause motor overheat or even burnt and cause frequency inverter over current stall or over current protection Voltage Vb s Aj peers i i i t gt fl f2 f3 fb Frequency V1 V3 1st 2nd and 3rd voltage percentages of multi point V F Vb Rated motor voltage fl f3 1st 2nd and 3rd voltage percentages of multi point V F fb Rated motor running frequency Diagram 5 32 Setting of multi point V F curve Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default V F slip compensation d2 09 Pra 0 0 200 0 0 0 coefficient This parameter is valid only for the asynchronous motor It can compensate the rotational speed slip of the asynchronous motor when the load of the motor increases stabilizing the motor speed in case
17. 000A Frequency inverter overload reached Password address Contents of input password 8000 000B Motor ovesoad OOIE OE load 1F00 hae 000C Input phase failure 001F PID lost during running 000D Output phase failure 0028 fast current limit fault Digital output terminal control write in only 000E IGBT verheat 007a Motor switchover fault during Address Of locking password command Contents of locking password command 000p Ezternal PP mention aye ey 0010 Communication fault 002A Too large speed deviation BITO DO1 output control EC bui OOB Ni d tact t ti BIT1 DO2 output control OEA AN a nae ca 0012 Current detection fault 002D Motor overheat BIT2 Relay 1 output control j 0013 Motor auto tuning fault 005A Encode lines setting fault BIT3 Relay 2 output control 0014 Encoder PG fault 005B Not connect to the encoder ooi BIT4 FMR output control ose Thai incstion tual E DNE 005E a cote a i BIT6 VDO2 pope IEC PACTA BIT7 VDO3 BIT8 VDO4 Group bA Communication parameters BIT9 VDO5 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default C icati bA 00 EEDI epee 0 Modbus protocol 0 Anal tput AO1 control write in only seein aooe SUE i y The EM11 now supports Modbus later will add the communication protocol such as PROFIBUS DP and SEO ARE OPH RAGES SS Connnaned fusenen CANopen protocol For details see the description of EM11 communication protocol 2002 0 7FFF indicates 0 100 Analog output AO2 control write in only Co
18. 7 i A implemented through combinations of 16 states of these four 8 Multi function terminal 3 terminals 9 Multi function terminal 4 10 Terminal UP If the frequency is determined by external terminals the terminals with the two functions are used as increment and decrement commands for frequency modification 11 Terminal DOWN TED When the frequency source is digital setting they are used to adjust the frequency If the frequency source is digital setting the terminal is used to 12 UP and DOWN setting clearjclear the modification by using the UP DOWN function or the terminal operation panel increment decrement key on the operation panel returning the set frequency to the value of b0 12 Terminal 1 fi lerati A 13 Pees E ae ion Totally four groups of acceleration deceleration time can be deceleration time selection PE selected through combinations of two states of these two Terminal 2 for acceleration A 14 ria i terminals deceleration time selection The terminal is used to perform switchover between two 15 Frequency source switchover ee frequency sources according to the setting in b0 07 Switchover between main After this terminal becomes ON the frequency source X is 16 frequency source X and preset replaced by the preset frequency b0 12 frequency itchi betw ili i TE S Witchoyer Denes auxiliary After this terminal is enabled the frequency source Y is replaced 17 frequency source Y and prese
19. C0 20 PID differential limit 0 00 100 00 0 10 0 Maximum positive C0 21 deviation between two 0 00 100 00 1 00 o PID outputs Maximum negative C0 22 deviation between two 0 00 100 00 1 00 i PID outputs C0 23 PID feedback filter time 0 00s 60 00s 0 00s Q C0 24 PID output filter time 0 00s 60 00s 0 00s 0 Detection value of PID 0 0 Not judging feedback loss E023 feedback loss _ 0 1 100 0 ie L Detection time of PID C0 26 feedback loss 0 0s 20 0s 0 0s 0 C0 27 PID operation at stop ONODI ciara eae 0 0 1 PID operation at stop Group C1 Multi function C1 00 Multi function 0 100 0 100 0 0 0 0 C1 01 Multi function 1 100 0 100 0 0 0 0 C1 02 Multi function 2 100 0 100 0 0 0 0 C1 03 Multi function 3 100 0 100 0 0 0 0 C1 04 Multi function 4 100 0 100 0 0 0 0 C1 05 Multi function 5 100 0 100 0 0 0 0 C1 06 Multi function 6 100 0 100 0 0 0 0 C1 07 Multi function 7 100 0 100 0 0 0 0 C1 08 Multi function 8 100 0 100 0 0 0 0 C1 09 Multi function 9 100 0 100 0 0 0 0 C1 10 Multi function 10 _ 100 0 100 0 0 0 0 C1 11 Multi function 11 _ 100 0 100 0 0 0 0 C1 12 Multi function 12 100 0 100 0 0 0 0 C1 13 Multi function 13 100 0 100 0 0 0 0 C1 14 Multi function 14 _ 100 0 100 0 0 0 0 C1 15 Multi function 15 _ 100 0 100 0 0 0 0 C1 16 Multi function 0 source 0 Set by C1 00 0 a 165
20. Communication setting 0 Digital setting 1 All Reverse speed limit in 2 AI2 0423 torque control 3 AI3 9 0 4 Pulse setting 5 Communication setting Forward maximum d4 30 frequency in torque 0 00 Hz maximum frequency b0 13 50 00 Hz o control Reverse maximum d4 31 frequency in torque 0 00 Hz maximum frequency b0 13 50 00 Hz o control d4 32 Aceeleration timein 10 005 120005 0 10s 0 torque control d4 33 Deceleration timein 005 120 005 0 10s D torque control Group d5 Motor 2 V F control parameters 0 Linear V F 1 Multi point V F 2 Square V F 3 1 2 power V F d5 00 V F curve setting 4 1 4 power V F 0 o 6 1 6 power V F 8 1 8 power V F 10 V F complete separation 11 V F half separation 0 0 Automatic torque boost d5 01 Torque boost 0 1 30 0 0 0 176 EM11 User s Manual Appendix II Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property 0 0 80 0 t off fi f d5 02 utor redene yo Actual cut off frequency Motor rated 50 0 0 torque boost k frequency d5 02 Multi point V F d5 03 BENS 0 00 Hz d5 05 0 00 Hz 0 frequency 1 F1 Multi point V F volt 5 04 V Pom Vit vo age 0 0 100 0 0 0 o0 10D Multi point V F d5 05 Ena d5 03 d5 07 0 00 Hz qo frequency 2 F2 Multi point V F voltage A 6 d5 06 2 V2 0 0 100 0 0 0 0 Multi point V F d5 07 cael ca d5 05 Maximum frequency b0 13 0 00 Hz 0 frequency 3 F3 Multi poin
21. Enabled after power on It is used to determine whether to check the motor is short circuited to ground after power on of the frequency inverter If this function is enabled the frequency inverter s UVW will have voltage output a while after power on Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default bb 09 Fault auto reset times 0 99 0 It is used to set the times of fault auto resets if this function is used After the value is exceeded the frequency inverter will remain in the fault state Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Relay action 0 Not act b 10 electi ri bi selection during bAa 0 fault auto reset It is used to decide whether DO acts during the fault auto reset if the fault auto reset function is used 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default bbig Time intervalot igo100 05 1 0s fault auto reset It is used to set the waiting time from the frequency inverter alarm to fault auto reset Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit Input phase loss protection Input phase loss 0 Disabled protection contactor 1 Enabled 0 Ten s digit Contactor energizing protection bb 12 is energizing protection selection a ae 0 1 same as Unit s digit It is used to determine whether to perform input phase loss or contactor energizing protection
22. Input filter al Brake unit EMII Frequency inverter DC choke Grounding Output filter Output choke Motor gt Grounding Diagram 3 2 Peripheral Devices Connection 3 Installation of Frequency Inverter EM11 User s Manual 19 3 4 Instructions of Main Circuit Peripheral Devices Table 3 1 Main circuit peripheral devices use instructions circuit Installati Parts Name hte i a Function Description Location The capacity of the circuit breaker shall be 1 5 to 2 times of the MCCB Front of input rated current of the inverter The protect time of the circuit breaker shall fully consider the time features of the inverter overload protection Residual current circuit breaker RCCB Front of input circuit As the inverter output is the high frequency pulse output there will be high frequency leakage current Special leakage circuit breaker shall be used when installing leakage circuit breaker at the input side of the inverter It is suggested that B type leakage circuit breaker be used and the leakage current value shall be set as 300mA Contactor Between MCCB and frequency inverter input side Frequently open and close of contactor will cause inverter failure so the highest frequency for opening and closing of contactor shall be not exceeded than 10 times min when braking resistor is used to avoid the over hot damage of the braking resistor thermal protection rel
23. ON ON ON OFF Reference 14 C1 14 As shown in the preceding figure when only K1 is ON the frequency inverter instructs forward rotation ON ON ON ON Reference 15 C1 15 When only K2 is ON the frequency inverter instructs reverse rotation When K1 and K2 are ON or OFF If the frequency source is multi function the value 100 of C1 00 C1 15 corresponds to the value of b0 13 simultaneous the frequency inverter stops Maximum frequency 1 Two line mode 2 Besides as the multi speed function the multi function can be also used as the PID setting source or the In this mode DI1 is RUN enabled terminal and DI2 determines the running direction The parameters are voltage source for V F separation satisfying the requirement on switchover of different setting values set as below Table 5 2 Function description of Acceleration Deceleration time selection terminals Code Name Value Function Description Terminal 2 Terminal 1 Acceleration Deceleration Time Corresponding b3 13 Terminal command mode 1 Two line 2 OFF OFF Acceleration Deceleration time 1 b0 21 b0 22 b3 00 DI function selection l RUN enabled OFF ON Acceleration Deceleration time 2 b2 03 b2 04 j ON OFF Acceleration Deceleration time 3 b2 05 b2 06 pel DIZ function selection 2 Forward ot reverse ON ON Acceleration Deceleration time 4 b2 07 b2 08 Kl K2 Runnin g Table 5 3 Function description of motor selection terminals Sie KI CDI Running enabled Terminal 1 Selected Motor Corresponding Parameters 1
24. Product with standard built in unit can realize DC bus and braking function at the same time if external DC reactor and braking function is needed please contact the manufacturer 3 9 Cautions for Main Circuit Wiring 3 9 1 Power Supply Wiring It is forbidden to connect the power cable to the inverter output terminal otherwise the internal components of the inverter will be damaged To facilitate the input side over current protection and maintenance after power off the inverter shall connect to the power supply through the circuit breaker or leakage circuit breaker and contactor Please confirm that the power supply phases rated voltage are consistent with that of the nameplate otherwise the inverter may be damaged 3 9 2 Motor Wiring It is forbidden to short circuit or ground the inverter output terminal otherwise the internal components of the inverter will be damaged Avoid short circuit the output cables or with the inverter enclosure otherwise there exists the danger of electric shock It is forbidden to connect the output terminal of the inverter to the capacitor or LC RC noise filter with phase lead otherwise the internal components of the inverter may be damaged When contactor is installed between the inverter and the motor it is forbidden to switch on off the contactor during the running of the inverter otherwise there will be large current flowing into the inverter triggering the inverter protection action
25. adjustment functions are still valid m After this terminal becomes ON the PID action direction is ot Reverse PID action direction reversed to the direction set in C0 04 If the PID parameters switchover performed by means of DI 25 PID parameter switchover terminal C0 12 1 When the terminal becomes OFF the PID parameters are C0 06 C0 08 when this terminal becomes ON the PID parameters switch to C0 09 C0 11 55 Value Function Description The terminal is used to restore the original status of PLC control 26 PLC status reset for the frequency inverter when PLC control is started again after a pause 27 Swing frequency pause The frequency inverter outputs the central frequency and the swing frequency function pauses 28 _ Counter input This terminal is used to count pulses 29 _ Counter reset This terminal is used to clear the counter status 30 Length count input This terminal is used to count the length 31 Length reset This terminal is used to clear the length 32 gD enabled only for DI6 is used for pulse input 33 Frequency modification After this terminal becomes ON the frequency inverter does not forbidden respond to any frequency modification ai It enables the frequency inverter to maintain the present 34 eoor anon Deceleration frequency output without being affected by external signals prohibited except the STOP command
26. b0 06 Range of auxiliary frequency Y 0 150 100 b0 07 Frequency source selection Unit s digit Frequency source selection 0 Main frequency source X 1 X and Y calculation calculation result determined by ten s digit 2 Switchover between X and Y 3 Switchover between X and X and Y calculation 4 Switchover between Y and X and Y calculation Ten s digit X and Y calculation relationship 0 X Y 1 X Y 2 Maximum of them 3 Minimum of them b0 08 Frequency offset of auxiliary frequency source of X and Y 0 00 Hz maximum frequency b0 13 0 00 Hz b0 09 Binding command source to frequency source Unit s digit Binding keypad command to following frequency source No binding Frequency source by digital setting All Al2 AI3 Pulse setting DI6 Multi function Simple PLC PID Communication setting Ten s digit Binding terminal command to frequency source SOOO Oe Ne 0 9 same as unit s digit Hundred s digit Binding communication command to frequency source 0 9 same as unit s digit Thousand s digit Automatically running binding to frequency source 0 9 same as unit s digit b0 10 Record of digital setting frequency of power failure 0 not record l record 143 44 EM11 User s Manual Appendix II Code Parameter Name Setting range Default
27. b3 01 DI2 function selection b3 02 DI3 function selection b4 04 DO output selection b6 01 AO1 output selection b1 00 Start mode b1 10 Stop mode 4 Operation and display EM11 User s Manual 35 d2 00 V F curve setting d2 01 Torque boost User can modify the user defined fast menu based on actual requirements 4 5 Monitoring Status Parameters In the stop or running state you can press b gt on the operation panel to display status parameters Whether parameters are displayed is determined by the binary bits of values converted from the values of b9 02 running parameter 1 b9 03 running parameter 2 and b9 04 stopping parameter in the hexadecimal format In stop state there are 16 status parameters you can select to displayed or not they are setting frequency bus voltage DI input status DO output status analog input AI1 voltage analog input AI2 voltage analog input AI3 voltage count value length value PLC running step load speed PID setting PULSE input frequency and three reserved parameters In running state there are five running state parameters running frequency setting frequency bus voltage output voltage and output current This five parameters are default displaying The other display parameter includes output power output torque DI input status DO output status analog input AI1 voltage analog input AI2 voltage analog input AI3 voltag
28. code 0 Al 01 eee eal function User visible function codes ub0 02 i code 1 Al 02 Tpersde ned Tunetion User visible function codes ub0 03 i code 2 A1 03 ee Rees function User visible function codes ub0 07 i code 3 defined functi A1 04 Deg Cee ene User visible function codes ub0 12 i code 4 defined functi A1 05 Uset detmed function User visible function codes ub0 21 i code 5 defined functi A1 06 Userdetmed Mnenon User visible function codes ub0 22 o code 6 defined functi A1 07 Userdetmed function User visible function codes ub3 00 o code 7 80 EM11 User s Manual Appendix II Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property A1 08 Da PE User visible function codes ub3 01 0 Warranty Agreement code A1 09 User defined function User visible function codes ub3 02 0 1 The warranty period of the product is 12 months refer to the barcode of nameplate During the code 9 EE a Usen dened Raeeon warranty period if the product fails or is damaged under the condition of normal use by following the Al1 10 Set code 10 User visible function codes ub4 04 O instructions EMHEATER will be responsible for free maintenance User defined function 2 Within the warranty period maintenance will be charged for the damages caused by the following Al 11 de 11 User visible function codes ub6 01 0 reasons
29. see the descriptions of group d2 119 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 40 DI input state visual i display It displays the DI state visually and the display format is shown in the following figure AI2 vD5 vD3 vD1 DIII DI9 DI7 DIS DI3 DII EE LE LA LAD E EER _ aa ON indicates high level OFF indicates low level AI3 AIl vD4 vD2 D112 DI10 DI8 DI6 DI4 DI2 Diagram 5 34 Display format of the DI state Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 41 DO Be state visual i display It displays the DO state visually and the display format is shown in the following figure vO4 v02 DO2 R2 DO3 DO state display me aor veer ON indicates high level OFF indicates low level vO5 v03 vOl1 DOI RI Diagram 5 35 Display format of the DO state Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 42 DI Tunction state visual display It displays whether the DI functions 1 40 are valid The operation panel has five 7 segment LEDs and each 7 segment LED displays the selection of eight functions The 7 segment LED is defined in the following figure 1 A aiam 7 DI terminal function display ON indicates valid 5 3 OFF indicates invalid 8 4 Diagram 5 36 Definition of 7 segment LED The 7 segment LED display functions 1 8 9 16 17 24 25 32 and 33 40 respec
30. 0 maximum frequency 20 0 value Over speed detection bb 18 0 0s 60 0s 1 0s time This function is valid only when the frequency inverter runs in the VC PG mode 84 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes If the actual motor rotational speed detected by the frequency inverter exceeded the maximum frequency and the excessive value is greater than the value of bb 17 and the lasting time exceeded the value of bb 18 the frequency inverter reports Err43 and acts according to the selected fault protection action If the bb 18 over speed detection time is 0 0s the over speed detection function is disabled Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Detection value of bb 19 too large speed 0 0 50 0 maximum frequency 20 0 deviation bb 20 Detection time ot t00 0 0s 60 0s 5 05 large speed deviation This function is valid only when the frequency inverter runs in the VC PG mode If the frequency inverter detects the deviation over than bb 19 between the actual motor rotational and the setting motor frequency and the duration time exceeds the value of bb 20 the frequency inverter reports Err42 and act according to the selected fault protection action If bb 20 Detection time of too large speed deviation is 0 0s this function is disabled Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Action selectionat 0 Invalid bb 21 instantaneous power 1
31. 0 0 value of AI2 p5 24 Third point input value ooy 10 00 v 5 00V 0 of AI2 Corresponding setting b5 25 of third point input 100 00 100 0 50 0 0 value of AI2 p5 26 Fourth point input value 00 y 10 00 y 7 50V 0 of AI2 Corresponding setting b5 27 of fourth point input 100 00 100 0 75 0 0 value of AI2 b5 28 AI2 maximum input 0 00V 10 00 V 10 00 V 0 b5 29 Corresponding setting 100 00 100 0 100 0 0 Appendix II EM11 User s Manual 153 Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property of AI2 maximum input b5 30 AI2 input filter time _ 0 00s 10 00s 0 10s a 5 31 UMP Point of AI2 input 9 004100 0 0 0 o corresponding setting Jump amplitude of AI2 b5 32 input corresponding 0 0 100 0 0 5 0 setting b5 33 AI3 minimum input 0 00 V 10 00 V 0 00 V 0 p5 34 Comesponding setting 49 00 100 0 0 0 o of AI3 minimum input Second point input b5 35 value of AI3 0 00 V 10 00 V 2 50V 0 Corresponding setting b5 36 of second point input 100 00 100 0 25 0 0 value of AI3 p5 37 Thi point input value 00 y 10 00 V 5 00V o of AI3 Corresponding setting b5 38 of third point input 100 00 100 0 50 0 0 value of AI3 Fourth point input value b5 39 of AB 0 00 V 10 00 V 7 50V 0 Corresponding setting b5 40 100 00 100 0 75 0 0 of fourth point b5 41 AI3 maximum input 0 00 V 10 00 V
32. 0 FWD OFF Motor 1 Group d0 Group d1 Group d2 ae DI2 Running direction ON Motor 2 Group d3 Group d4 Group d5 1 1 REV Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 0 STOP b3 12 DI filter time 0 000s 1 000s 0 010s It is used to set the software filter time of DI terminal status If DI terminals are liable to interference and 0 1 STOP C OMidigitalgonuon may cause malfunction increase the value of this parameter to enhance the anti interference capability However increase of DI filter time will slow down the response of DI terminals Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 7 mg g z As shown in the preceding figure if K1 is ON the frequency inverter instructs forward rotation when K2 is 0 Two line mode 1 a OFF and instructs reverse rotation when K2 is ON If K1 is OFF the Frequency inverter stops b3 13 Terminal command mode 1x Teele mode 2 0 2 Three line mode 1 2 Three line mode 1 In this mode DI3 is RUN enabled terminal and the direction is decided by DI1 and DI2 The parameters are 3 Three line mode 2 set as below Diagram 5 11 Setting of two line mode 2 57 58 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes Code Name Value Function Description b3 13 Terminal command mode 2 Three line 1 b3 00 DII function selection 1 Forward RUN FWD b3 01 DI function selection 2 Reverse RUN REV b3 02 DI3 function selection 3 Three line contr
33. 10 V 1 limit of protection AIl input volt 7 b5 06 PUT Vo tage UPPer y5 0510 00 V 6 80 V 0 limit of protection pzz Minput mimma lUi ooaebses 0 00 V 0 value 152 EM11 User s Manual Appendix II Code Parameter Name Setting range Default _ Property ps og Comesponding setting 49 00 100 0 0 0 o of AIl minimum input Second point input b5 09 value of AI 0 00 V 10 00 V 2 50V 0 Corresponding setting b5 10 of second point input 100 0 100 0 25 0 0 value of AII p5 11 Third point input value lo 00 y 10 00 V 5 00V 0 of All Corresponding setting b5 12 of third point input _ 100 0 100 0 50 0 0 value of AII p5 13 ee eee value l 00 y 10 00 V 7 50V 0 of All Corresponding setting b5 14 of fourth point input 100 0 100 0 75 0 0 value of AII AIl input maximum b5 15 0 00 V 10 00 V 10 00 V 0 value ps 16 Comesponding setting 49 00 100 0 100 0 o of AII maximum input b5 17 Allinput filter time _ 0 00s 10 00s 0 10s 0 ps 1g UMP Point of AIT input 49 00 100 0 0 0 o corresponding setting Jump amplitude of b5 19 Allinput corresponding 0 0 100 0 0 5 0 setting b5 20 AI2 minimum input 0 00 V 10 00 V 0 00 V 0 ps 21 Corresponding setting 100 00 100 0 0 0 0 of AI2 minimum input b5 22 Second point input 9 00 y 10 00 V 2 50V 0 value of AI2 Corresponding setting b5 23 of second point input 100 00 100 0 25
34. 100 00 137 138 EM11 User s Manual Appendix I Appendix I EM11 User s Manual Control command input frequency inverter write in only Pulse output control write in only Command word address Command function Command word address Command function 0001 Forward running 2004 0 7FFF indicates 0 100 0002 Reverse running 0003 Forward jog Inverter fault description 2000 0004 Reverse jog Inverter fault 3 J ar Inverter fault information 0005 Free stop description 0006 Decelarating stop 0000 No fault 0015 EEPROM read write in fault 0007 Fault reset 0001 Reserved 0016 Frequency inverter hardware fault 0002 acceleration over current 0017 Short circuit to ground fault Read inverter status read only 0003 deceleration over current 0018 Reversed Command word address Command function 0004 Constant speed over current 0019 Reversed 0001 Forward running 0005 acceleration over voltage 001A Accumulative running time 3000 0002 Reverse running 0006 deceleration over voltage reached 0003 Stop 0007 Constant speed over voltage 001B User defined fault 1 0008 Buffer resistor fault 001C User defined fault 2 Parameter locking password collation If the feedback is the 8888H it indicates the password collation 0009 less voltage fault 001D Accumulative power on time passed
35. 150 4 1 0 EM11 G3 400 P3 450 1200 1000 150 4 150 4 1 0 3 6 Removal and mounting of operating panel and cover 3 6 1 Removal and mounting of operating panel keypad The operating panel of EM11 series Frequency inverter is a plug type If you need to take it off when use or maintenance please make sure the gentle actions or it is easy to damage the plug type connection terminals on operating panel The removal and mounting of operating panel keypad is showed as Diagram3 3 and Diagram3 4 lt 1 Diagram 3 3 Removal of operating panel keypad Diagram 3 4 Mounting of operating panel keypad 3 6 2 Removal and Mounting of Frequency Inverter The EM11 series frequency inverter above 7 5kw 380V uses plastic case The removal and mounting of upper cover refers Diagram3 5 Please use tool to push the hooks on both side of lower cover 21 22 EM11 User s Manual 3 Installation of Frequency Inverter Operating panel Ne Lower cover Hook Cabling hole Diagram 3 5 The cover removal of plastic case The EM11 series frequency inverter above 11kw 380V uses metal case The removal and mounting of lower cover refers figure3 6 Using thumb to unscrew and push lower cover and raise the cover Operating panel Thumb screw Cabling hole Diagram 3 6 EM11I series layout sketch 3 7 Connection Terminals Diagram Description i Cont
36. 6 005 120 00s 0 10s torque control di 33 Deceleration time an 6 005 120 00s 0 10s torque control In torque control the difference between the motor output torque and the load torque determines the speed change rate of the motor and load The motor rotational speed may change quickly and this will result in noise or too large mechanical stress The setting of acceleration deceleration time in torque control makes the motor rotational speed change softly 109 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual However in applications requiring rapid torque response set the acceleration deceleration time in torque control to 0 00s For example two frequency inverters are connected to drive the same load To balance the load allocation set one frequency inverter as master in speed control and the other as slave in torque control The slave receives the master s output torque as the torque command and must follow the master rapidly In this case the acceleration deceleration time of the slave in torque control is set to 0 0s 5 20 Group d2 Motor 1 V F Control Parameters Group d2 is valid only for V F control The V F control mode is applicable to low requirement load applications fan or pump or applications where one frequency inverter operates multiple motors or there is a large difference between the frequency inverter power and the motor power Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Li
37. 9 5004 000 V 2 000V 0 AIl calibration 1 i Ideal voltage of AI1 b8 02 Sgt 6 000 9 999 V 8 000V 0 calibration 2 p8 o3 Sampling voltage of lE 0009 999 V 8 000V 0 AIl calibration 2 Ideal voltage of A12 b8 04 sat eae pa 0 500 4 000 V 2 000V 0 calibration 1 p8 o5 Sampling voltage of 5004 000 V 2 000V qo i AI calibration 1 f i Ideal voltage of A12 b8 06 ee 6 000 9 999 V 8 000V 0 calibration 2 p8 o7 Sampling voltage of lE 0009 999 V 8 000V qo j AI calibration 2 i f f Ideal voltage of A13 b8 08 ss ike 0 500 4 000 V 2 000V 0 calibration 1 ps o9 Sampling voltage of lo 5004 000 V 2 000V 0 i AL calibration 1 i b8 10 deal voltage of AB fe 000 9 999 V 8 000V 0 calibration 2 Sampling voltage of b8 11 6 000 9 999 V 8 000V AI3 calibration 2 0 Ideal voltage of AO1 BEIA S ee 0 500 4 000 V 2 000V 0 calibration 1 Measured voltage of b8 13 AOI calibration 0500 4 000 V 2 000V 0 Ideal voltage of AO1 e See re 6 000 9 999 V 8 000V 0 calibration 2 Measured voltage of b8 15 AOlcalibratign 2 6000 9 999 V 8 000V 0 Ideal voltage of AO2 b8 16 00e vo tase o 0 500 4 000 V 2 000V 0 calibration 1 Appendix II EM11 User s Manual Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property b8 17 Measured voltage of AO2 calibration 1 0 500 4 000 V 2 000V o b8 18 Ideal voltage of AO2 calibration 2 6 000 9 999 V 8 000V o b8 19 Measured voltage of AO2 calibration 2 6 000
38. Codes EM11 User s Manual 43 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default ee 0 Forward direction b0 18 Rotation direction Sony 0 1 Reverse direction You can change the rotation direction of the motor just by modifying this parameter without changing the motor wiring Modifying this parameter is equivalent to exchanging any two phase of the motor s U V W wires Note The motor will restore original running direction after parameter initialization A0 09 Do not use this function in applications where changing the rotating direction of the motor is prohibited after system commissioning is complete Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Base frequency for UP b0 19 DOWN modification during running This parameter is valid only when the frequency source is digital setting It is used to set the base frequency to be modified by using keys AAand V or the terminal UP DOWN function If the running frequency and setting frequency are different there will be a large difference between the frequency inverter s performance during the acceleration deceleration process 0 Running frequency 1 Setting frequency Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Aeda Deede 0 Linear acceleration deceleration b0 20 CCE etalon PEDE ETAMON 1 S curve acceleration deceleration A 0 mode 2 S curve acceleration deceleration B It is used to set the frequency changing mode du
39. Decelerate 0 failure 2 Decelerate to stop Voltage rally bb 22 Judgingtimeat 9 00s 100 00s 0 00s instantaneous power failure Judging voltage of bb 23 instantaneous power 60 0 100 0 standard bus voltage 80 0 failure Judging voltage of bb 24 instantaneous power 60 0 100 0 standard bus voltage 90 0 failure restoring Of instantaneous power failure or sudden voltage dip the DC bus voltage of the Frequency inverter reduces This function enables the Frequency inverter to compensate the DC bus voltage reduction with the load feedback energy by reducing the output frequency so as to keep the Frequency inverter running continuously Ifbb 21 1 when instantaneous power failure or sudden voltage dip the frequency inverter decelerates until DC bus voltage restore to normal the frequency inverter accelerates to the set frequency If the DC bus voltage remains normal for the time exceeding the value set in bb 22 it is considered that the DC bus voltage restores to normal If bb 21 2 when instantaneous power failure or sudden voltage dip the frequency inverter decelerates to stop n Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual 85 Bus voltage A BB 24 j gt Time t Output Frequency A Hz BB 23 BB 21 1 Decelerate f P lt j gt Time t Output Frequency A Deceleration Deceleration Acceleration Hz time3 time4 time BB
40. EM11 G1 d75 80W gt 150Q EM11 G1 1d5 100W gt 100Q EM11 G1 2d2 100W 70Q Three phase 220V EM11 G2 d75 150W gt 110Q EM11 G2 1d5 250W gt 100Q EM11 G2 2d2 300W 650 EM11 G2 004 400W 450 EM11 G2 5d5 800W gt 220 EM11 G2 7d5 1000W gt 16Q EM11 G2 011 1500W 110 EM11 G2 015 2500W 80 EM11 G2 018 3 7kW 2 8 09 Built in as Add B to the EM11 G2 022 4 5kW gt 80 option model EM11 G2 030 5 5 kW 40 EM11 G2 037 7 5 kW gt 40 EM11 G2 045 4 5 kWx2 gt 40x2 External EM11 G2 055 5 5 kWx2 gt 40x2 External 6 EM11 User s Manual 2 Product Information 3 Installation of Frequency Inverter EM11 User s Manual Recommend Recommend Braking 3 Installation of Frequency Inverter Model power of resistance value of Remarks unit braking resistor braking resistor EM11 G2 075 16k W 120 External 3 1 Installation environment Three phase 380V 1 The place with indoor vents or ventilation devices EM11 G3 d75 P3 1d5 150W gt 3002 2 The environment temperature shall be 10 C 40 C If the temperature is over 40 Cbut less than 50 C EM11 G3 1d5 P3 2d2 150W gt 22002 better to take down the cover of frequency inverter or open the front door of cabinet to facilitate heat EM11 G3 2d2 P3 004 250W gt 2002 dissipation EM11 G3 004 P3 5d5 300W gt 130Q Built in as No special 3 Try to avoid high temperature and wet place the humidity shall be less than 90 wi
41. Fan working during power on It is used to set the working mode of the cooling fan If this parameter is set to 0 the fan works when the frequency inverter is in running state When the frequency inverter stops the cooling fan works if the heatsink temperature is higher than 40 C and stops working if the heatsink temperature is lower than 40 C If this parameter is set to 1 the cooling fan keeps working after power on Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b2 24 Dormant frequency 0 00Hz wakeup frequency b2 26 0 00 Hz b2 25 Dormant delay time 0 0s 6000 0s 0 0s b2 26 Wakeup frequency Dormant frequency b2 24 maximum 0 00 Hz frequency b0 13 b2 27 Wakeup delay time 0 0s 6000 0s 0 0s These parameters are used to implement the dormant and wakeup functions in the water supply application When the frequency inverter is in running state the frequency inverter enters the dormant state and stops automatically after the dormant delay time b2 25 if the set frequency is lower than or equal to the dormant frequency b2 24 When the frequency inverter is in dormant state and the present running command is effective the frequency inverters starts up after the wakeup delay time b2 27 if the set frequency is higher than or equal to the wakeup frequency b2 26 Generally set the wakeup frequency should be equal to or higher than the dormant frequency If the wakeup frequency and dormant frequency are set
42. Frequency Inverter Table of Contents Safety Information and Precautions 1 1 Safety Information 1 Before installation 2 During installation 3 Wiring eesse 4 Before power on 5 After power on 6 During operation 1 7 Maintenance 1 2 General Precautions 1 2 1 Motor insulation test 1 2 2 Thermal protection of motor 1 2 3 Running at over 50 Hz 1 2 4 Vibration of mechanical device 1 2 5 Motor heat and noise 1 2 6 Voltage sensitive device or capacitor at output side of the Frequency inverter 1 2 7 Contactor at the Input Output side of the frequency inverter 1 2 8 When input voltage is over rated voltage range 0 ee 1 2 9 Prohibition of three phase input changed into two phase input 1 2 10 Surge suppressor 1 2 11 Altitude and de rating 1 2 12 Some special usages 1 2 13 Disposal 1 2 14 Adaptable Motor Product Information 2 1 Designation Rules 2 2 Nameplate 2 3 EM11 Series Frequency Inverter 2 4 Technical Specifications 2 5 Product appearance and installation dimension 2 5 1 Product appearance 2 5 2 Appearance and Installation Hole Dimension mm of EM11 Frequency Inverter 2 5 3 Appearance and installation dimension of external keypad keypad tray 2 6 Options 2 7 Daily maintenance of frequency inverters 2 7 1 Daily maintenance 2 7 2 Regular inspection 2 7 3 Wearing parts replacement 2 7 4 Storage of the frequency inverter 2 8 Warranty Items 2 9 Selection Guide of brak
43. Low DC bus voltage Code Parameter Name Display Range Sent value of U0 49 point point 100 00 100 00 communication Received value of U0 50 point point 100 00 100 00 communication It displays the data at point point communication U0 49 is the data sent by the master and U0 50 is the data received by the slave 5 24 Group A0 System parameters Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default A0 00 User password 0 65535 0 If it is set to any non zero number the password protection function is enabled After a password has been set and taken effect you must enter the correct password in order to enter the menu If the entered password is incorrect you cannot view or modify parameters If A0 00 is set to 00000 the previously set user password is cleared and the password protection function is disabled 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default AO 01 Product number Frequency inverter product number Mod l dependent 3 Model A0 02 Software version Software version of control board dependent A0 07 Parameter 0 Modifiable A modification property 1 Not modifiable Tt is used to set whether the parameters are modifiable to avoid mal function If it is set to 0 all parameters are modifiable If it is set to 1 all parameters can only be viewed Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit
44. OV 10 V Analog terminal 1 Output current range OMA 20 mA output Analog AO2 GND output Output voltage range 0OV 10V terminal 2 28 EM11 User s Manual 3 Installation of Frequency Inverter Type pees P Ee Terminal function description Optical coupling isolation dual polarity open collector output Output voltage range 0V 24 V Digital output Output current range 0mA 50 mA DOI CME 1 Note that CME and COM are internally insulated but they are shorted by jumper externally by factory default In this Digital case DO is driven by 24 V If you want to drive DO1 by output external power supply please remove jumper between CME and COM It is set by b4 00 FM terminal output mode selection High Speed As high speed pulse output the maximum frequency hits FM COM_ Pulse Output 100 kHz Terminal As open collector output its function is the same as that of DOl It is set by b4 00 FM terminal output mode selection High Speed As high speed pulse output the maximum frequency hits FM COM Pulse Output 100 kHz Relay Terminal As open collector output its function is the same as that of output DOI y Contact driving capacity 250 VAC 3 A COS 0 4 TA TB NC terminal DC30V 1A TA TC NO terminal Auxiliary IPI Extension Connect to an optional card I O extension card PLC card interface card interface and various bus cards PG card Support various types of PG cards OC differ
45. SVC mode 1 1 a d6 07 Flux braking gain 0 150 100 0 d6 08 Flux compensation gain 0 200 Default value is 100 100 a GOOD Fux compensahon lo yarie60NOHS 20 00Hz qo cut off frequency d6 10 Excitation current loop 0 500 100 0 KP d6 11 Torque current loop KP 0 500 0 0 d6 12 Torque current filtering 0 31 28 0 time coefficient d6 13 No load current boost 0 0 50 0 10 0 a d6 14 Cut off frequency for no 0 00Hz 20 00Hz 15 00Hz 0 load current boost d6 15 Field weakening gain 50 150 100 0 Group U0 Standard Monitoring Parameters U0 00 Running frequency _ 0 00 300 00 Hz b0 11 2 e U0 01 Setting frequency _ 0 00 3000 0 Hz b0 11 1 U0 02 DC Bus voltage 0 0 3000 0 V U0 03 Output voltage 0V 1140 V e 0 00A 655 35 A Frequency inverter power lt 55 kW U0 04 Output current 0 0A 6553 5 A Frequency inverter gt 7 power gt 55 kW U0 05 Output power 0 32767 e U0 06 Output torque 200 0 200 0 U0 07 DI state 0 32767 U0 08 DO state 0 1023 U0 09 All voltage U0 10 AL voltage U0 11 AI voltage U0 12 Count value U0 13 Length value U0 14 Load speed display _ 0 65535 e U0 15 PID setting 0 65535 U0 16 PID feedback 0 65535 U0 17 PLC stage U0 18 Input pulse frequency 0 00kHz 100 00 kHz U0 19 Feedback speed 3000 0Hz 3000 0 Hz _ i unit 0 01Hz 300 00Hz 300 00 Hz U0 20_ Remaining running time 0 0min 6500 0 min e uo 21 A voltag
46. Single phase 220V 50 60Hz EM11 G1 d75 0 75 1 0 8 2 4 1 5 0 030 EM11 G1 1d5 1 5 2 0 14 7 3 0 0 055 EM11 G1 2d2 2 2 3 0 23 9 6 4 0 0 072 Three phase 220V 50 60Hz EM11 G2 d75 0 75 1 5 3 8 3 0 030 EM11 G2 1d5 1 5 2 5 8 al 4 0 055 EM11 G2 2d2 2 2 3 10 5 9 5 9 0 072 EM11 User s Manual 2 Product Information 2 Product Information EM11 User s Manual Adaptable Motor Input Output Power Thermal Power Model Current Current Capacity Consumption KW HP A A KVA KW EM11 G2 004 3 7 5 14 6 13 8 9 0 132 EM11 G2 5d5 5 5 TS 26 25 17 0 214 EM11 G2 7d5 7 5 10 35 32 21 0 288 EM11 G2 011 11 15 46 5 45 30 0 489 EM11 G2 015 15 20 62 60 40 0 608 EM11 G2 018 18 5 25 76 75 57 0 716 EM11 G2 022 22 30 92 91 69 0 887 EM11 G2 030 30 40 113 112 85 1 11 EM11 G2 037 37 50 157 150 114 1 32 EM11 G2 045 45 60 180 176 134 1 66 EM11 G2 055 55 75 214 210 160 1 98 EM11 G2 075 75 100 307 304 231 2 02 Three phase 380V 50 60Hz EM11 G3 d75 0 75 1 3 4 2 1 1 5 0 027 EM11 G3 1d5 EM11 P3 1d5 1 5 2 5 3 8 3 0 050 EM11 G3 2d2 EM11 P3 2d2 2 2 3 5 8 5 1 4 0 066 EM11 G3 004 EM11 P3 004 3 7 5 10 5 9 5 9 0 120 EM11 G3 5d5 EM11 P3 5d5 5 5 75 14 6 13 8 9 0 195 EM11 G3 7d5 EM11 P3 7d5 7 5 10 20 5 17 11 0 262 EM11 G3 011 EM11 P3 011 11 15 26 25 17 0 4
47. User s Manual Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit Modbus baud ratio 0 300 BPS 1 600 BPS 2 1200 BPS bA 01 Baud ratio setting 3 2400 BPS 5 4 5 6 4800 BPS 9600 BPS 19200 BPS 7 38400 BPS This parameter is used to set the data transfer baud rate from host computer to frequency inverter Please note that baud rate of the host computer and the inverter should be consistent Otherwise the communication is impossible The higher the baud rate is the faster the communication is Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 No check data format lt 8 N 2 gt 1 Even parity check data format lt 8 E 1 gt bA 02 Modbus Data format 2 Odd Parity check data format lt 8 0 1 gt 0 3 No check data format lt 8 N 1 gt Valid for Modbus The host computer and inverter setup data format must be consistent otherwise communication is impossible Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default bA 03 Broadcast address 1 249 0 Broadcast address Valid for Modbus 0 When the local address is set to 0 that is broadcast address it can realize the broadcast function of host computer The address is unique it is base of point to point communication between host computer and frequency inverter Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default bA 04 ce oe 0 20 ms Only valid for Modbus 2 ms elay Response delay it refers
48. User defined parameter QUICK display selection a 0 Not display Individualized i A0 08 parameter display 1 Display 0 Ten s digit User changed parameter QUICK display property selection 0 Not display 1 Display The setting of parameter display mode aims to facilitate you to view different types of parameters based on actual requirements If one digit of A0 08 is set to 1 you can switch over to different parameter display modes by pressing key QUICK By default only the frequency inverter parameter display mode is used The display codes of different parameter types are shown in the following table Table 6 10 Display codes of different parameter types Parameter Type Display Code Frequency inverter parameter display dFLt User defined parameter display user User changed parameter display cHGd The EM11 provides display of two types of individualized parameters user defined parameters and user modified parameters You defined parameters are included in group A1 You can add a maximum of 32 parameters convenient for commissioning In user defined parameter mode symbol u is added before the function code For example b0 00 is displayed as ub0 00 In User changed parameter mode symbol c is added before the function code For example b0 00 is displayed as cb0 00 The User changed parameters are grouped together in QUICK menu which is convenient for on site troubl
49. affected The frequency inverter may alarm or even be damaged when short circuit exists on cables or inside the motor Therefore perform insulation short circuit test when the motor and cables are newly installed or during routine maintenance During the test make sure that the frequency inverter is disconnected from the tested parts 2 Product Information EM11 User s Manual 2 Product Information 2 1 Designation Rules EM11 G3 015 Code Adaptation Motor EMHEATER 11 series 5d5 5 5KW 7 5HP frequency inverter 015 15KW 20HP Code Type G General use Code Voltage P Fan amp Pump 1 1 phase 220V H Heavy Load 3 phase 220V L For Lift 3 3 phase 380V S For servo 4 3 phase 480V T Torque control 6 3 phase 690V Diagram 2 1 Designation rules 2 2 Nameplate ia EMHEATER Frequency Inverter CE Model EM11 G3 015 Power 15KW Input 3PH 380V 50 60Hz Output 32A 0 400Hz Manufacturer China EM Technology Limited Made In China www emheater com El M11G30152014010100001 Diagram 2 2 Nameplate 2 3 EM11 Series Frequency Inverter Table 2 1 Models and technical data of EM11 Adaptable Motor Input Output Power Thermal Power Model Current Current Capacity Consumption KW HP A A KVA KW
50. avoid the interference caused by the leakage current of the inverter s earth wire when common earth mode is adopted 3 S The surrounding equipment is separately earthed which can avoid the interference caused by the leakage current of the inverter s earth wire when common earth mode is adopted 6 3 5 Leakage current and handling There are two forms of leakage current when using the inverter One is leakage current to the earth and the other is leakage current between the cables 1 Factors influencing the leakage current to the earth and the solutions There are distributed capacitance between the lead cables and the earth The larger the distributed capacitance is the larger the leakage current will be The distributed capacitance can be reduced by effectively reducing the distance between the inverter and the motor The higher the carrier frequency is the larger the leakage current will be The leakage current can be reduced by reducing the carrier frequency However reducing the carrier frequency may result in addition of motor noise Note that additional installation of reactor is also an effective method to remove the leakage current The leakage current may increase following the addition of circuit current Therefore when the motor 126 EM11 User s Manual 6 EMC Electromagnetic compatibility power is high the corresponding leakage current will be high too 2 Factors of producing leakage current between the c
51. bC 06 Input terminals status of _ a latest fault bC 07 Output terminal status D of latest fault bC 08 Frequency inverter _ 7 status of latest fault bC 09 Power on time of latest a Us k fault bC 10 Running time of latest _ fault bC 11 Frequency of 2nd fault bC 12 Current of 2nd fault bC 13 DC Bus voltage of 2nd _ 7 t fault Input terminal status of bC 14 2nd fault Output terminal status T bC 15 of 2nd fault 7 Frequency inverter pene status of 2nd fault i bC 17 Power on time of 2nd a 2 fault bC 18 Running time of 2nd a fault bC 19 Frequency of Ist fault e bC 20 Current of Ist fault 163 Appendix IT EM11 User s Manual Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property bC 21 DC Bus voltage of Ist i fault bC 22 Input terminal status of _ E e lst fault Output terminal status bC 23 of Ist fault bC 24 Frequency inverter z status of 1st fault bC 25 Power on time of Ist 5 2 2 fault bC 26 Running time of Ist E e fault Group C0 PID Control Function 0 C0 01 1 All 2 AI2 C0 00 PID setting source 3 AI3 0 o 4 Pulse setting DI6 5 Communication setting 6 Multi function C0 01 PID digital setting 0 0 100 0 50 0 0 C0 02 PID setting change time 0 00s 650 00s 0 00s 0 0 AIL 1 AI2 2 AI3 3 Pulse setting HDI
52. bb 10 Relay action selection 0 Not act 0 during fault auto reset 1 Act a 60 EM11 User s Manual Appendix II Code Parameter Name Setting range Default _ Property bb 11 Time interval of fault 0 1s 100 0s 10s 0 auto reset Input phase loss bb 12 prote tion c ntactor 0 Disabled 0 0 energizing protection 1 Enabled selection bb 13 Output phase loss 0 Disabled 0 0 protection 1 Enabled A 0 Disabled bb 14 Off load protection 1 Enabled 0 0 bb 15_ Off load detection level 0 0 100 0 rated motor current 1 0 0 bb 16 Offload detection time 0 0s 60 0s 1 0s 0 bb 17 Aak detection 10 0 50 0 maximum frequency 20 0 0 value speed detecti 7 SA OPE detection Io ening 1 0s 0 time Detecti lue of t z bb 19 eee Of 100 0 0 50 0 maximum frequency 20 0 0 large speed deviation Detection ti ft bb 20 y Scan neo O0 0 0s 60 0s 5 0s 0 large speed deviation Action selection at 0 Invalid bb 21 instantaneous power 1 Decelerate 0 O failure 2 Decelerate to stop Voltage rally judging bb 22 time at instantaneous 0 00s 100 00s 0 00s o power failure Judging voltage of bb 23 instantaneous power 60 0 100 0 standard bus voltage 80 0 O failure Judging voltage of bb 24 instantaneous power 60 0 100 0 standard bus voltage 90 0 0 failure restoring Tepe afinoicr 0 No temperature sensor bbe eae sensor sehen 0 D p 2 PT1000 Mot heat 7 bb 26 ot
53. code Per User defined function apie mane J io A Improper use or repair modification without prior permission i code 12 een eee beta B Fire flood abnormal voltage other disasters and secondary disaster A1 13 User defined function U isible functi d 1 10 C Hardware damage caused by dropping or transportation after procurement ser visible function codes ubl code 13 D Improper operation Al 14 User defined function User visible function codes ud2 00 0 E Trouble out of the frequency inverter for example external device code 14 3 If there is any failure or damage to the product please correctly fill out the Product Warranty Card in User defined functi a z Al 15 ae e 5 aan User visible function codes ud2 01 0 detail U ae funcii 4 The maintenance fee is charged according to the latest Maintenance Price List of EMHEATER ser defined function is m Al 16 code 16 User visible function codes uA0 00 U 5 The Product Warranty Card is not re issued Please keep the card and present it to the maintenance User defined function personnel when asking for maintenance AL I7 code 17 User visible function codes uA0 00 H 6 If there is any problem during the service contact EMHEATER s agent or EMHEATER directly User defined function 7 7 This agreement shall be interpreted by China EM Technology Limited Al 18 User visible function codes uA0 00 code 18 Product Warranty Card defined funct 7 Aig USt ae i neton Uger visible f
54. d dent 0s 65000s b0 25 0 PpENCRA Acceleration time indicates the time required by the frequency inverter to accelerate from 0 Hz to Acceleration Deceleration base frequency b0 26 that is tl in Diagram 6 3 Including f is setting frequency fb is motor rated frequency T is the acceleration time from 0 Hz to rated frequency fb Deceleration time indicates the time required by the frequency inverter to decelerate from Acceleration Deceleration base frequency b0 26 to 0 Hz that is t2 in Diagram 6 3 Output frequency A Hz Acceleration Deceleration base frequency Setting frequency Se i I I Nt at gt 0 Actual Acc ActualDec iTime t time oo poi time f d HS a gt Setting acceleration Setting deceleration time T1 time T2 Diagram 5 3 Acceleration Deceleration time The EM11 provides totally four groups of acceleration deceleration time for selection You can perform switchover by using a DI terminal And you can set the four groups of acceleration deceleration time through the following function codes Group 1 b0 21 b0 22 Group 2 b2 03 b2 04 Group 3 b2 05 b2 06 Group 4 b2 07 b2 08 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default pag Time proportion of S curve 0 0 100 0 minus b0 24 30 0 start segment Time proportion of S curve b0 24 0 0 100 0 minus b0 23 30 0 end segment These two parameters respect
55. equal Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default ef ea change 0 00s 650 00s 0 00s Ime The PID setting change time indicates the time required for PID setting changing from 0 0 to 100 0 The PID setting changes linearly according to the change time reducing the impact caused by sudden setting change on the system Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default All AI2 AI3 Pulse setting HDI All AI2 0 All AI2 MAX AT AI2 MIN AI1 AI2 Communication setting This parameter is used to select the feedback signal channel of process PID The PID feedback is a relative PID feedback source C0 03 So e od tt 2 oo value and ranges from 0 0 to 100 0 Similarly the feedback of PID is also a relative value The function of PID is to make the two values the equal Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 F d acti C0 04 PID action direction A ce 0 1 Reverse action 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual 0 Forward action When the feedback value is smaller than the PID setting the frequency inverter s output frequency rises For example the winding tension control requires forward PID action 1 Reverse action When the feedback value is smaller than the PID setting the frequency inverter s output frequency reduces For example the unwinding tension control requires reverse PID action Note this f
56. frequency inverter reports motor overload fault or 150 x bb 02 xrated motor current if the load remains at this value for 60 minutes the frequency inverter reports motor overload fault Set bb 02 properly based on the actual overload capacity If the value of bb 02 is set too large may result in damaging to the motor because the motor overheats but the frequency inverter does not report the alarm 81 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Motor overload bb 03 pre warning 50 100 80 coefficient This function is used to give a warning signal to the control system via DO before motor overload protection This parameter is used to determine the percentage at which pre warning is performed before motor overload The larger the value is the less advance the pre warning will be When the output current of the frequency inverter is greater than the value of the overload inverse time lag curve multiplied by bb 03 the DO terminal of the frequency inverter set with motor overload pre warning becomes ON Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default bb 04 Overvoltage stall 0 100 0 gain bb os Overvoltage stall 1309 150 130 protective voltage When the DC bus voltage exceeds the value of bb 05 Overvoltage stall protective voltage during deceleration of the frequency inverter the frequency inverter stops deceleration
57. i EM11 G3 200 P3 220 20 kW gt 2 50 woe B h EM11 G3 220 P3 250 22 kW 2 50 aaa ai Ss EM11 G3 250 P3 280 12 5 kWx2 gt 2 50x2 o f M EM11 G3 280 P3 315 14 kWx2 gt 2 5Qx2 External EM BU5H EM11 G3 315 P3 355 16 kWx2 gt 2 5Qx2 Gas peonon i EM11 G3 355 P3 400 17 kWx2 gt 2 5Qx2 eae EMBU Airinlet i EM11 G3 400 P3 450 14 kWx3 gt 2 50x3 LLA 2 9 3 Braking resistor connection description Diagram3 1 Ventilating duct installation dimension diagram of frequency inverter The braking resistor connection of EM11 series frequency inverter is showed as below Installation dimension Power class P P A B lt 7 5kW gt 20mm gt 100mm Inverter Braking Resistor Inverter erg Braking Resistor 11kW 30kW gt 50mm gt 200mm 37kW gt 50mm gt 300mm PB PB Please install the frequency inverter vertically to send out the heat upward and pay attention to direction of frequency inverter to avoid inversion Diagram 2 7 Braking resistor connection scheme If there are several units of frequency inverter installed please install them side by side do not to install up and down EM11 User s Manual 3 Installation of Frequency Inverter 3 3 Peripheral Devices Connection Diagram AC Power supply wt LEG sie E p 4 LE m AC Contactor i wee n E s input choke is a 4 Brake resistor
58. is shown in the following figure 48 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes Output frequency A Hz Initial frequency of stop DC braking joes je nee ane ee gt Time t Effective value of output voltage l i Waiting time of gt stop DC braking Stop DC braking Ne he Ste i t f gt lt gt Time t Stop DC braking time Run command Diagram 5 5 Stop DC braking process 5 3 Group b2 Auxiliary Functions Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b2 00 JOG running frequency 0 00 Hz maximum frequency 6 00 Hz b2 01 JOG acceleration time 0 0s 6500 0s Mode dependent b2 02 JOG deceleration time 0 0s 6500 0s Model dependent These parameters are used to define the set frequency and acceleration deceleration time of the frequency inverter when jogging The startup mode is fixed as Direct start b1 00 0 and the stop mode is fixed as Decelerate to stop b1 07 0 during jogging Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Mod b2 03 Acceleration time 2 0 0s 6500 0s ce dependen b2 04 Deceleration time 2 0 0s 6500 0s Mode dependen Mod b2 05 Acceleration time 3 0 0s 6500 0s oes dependent b2 06 Deceleration time 3 0 0s 6500 0s Mode dependen b2 07 Acceleration time 4 0 0s 6500 0s Moge dependen Mod b2 08 Deceleration time 4 0 0s 6500 0s oc dependen The EM11 provides a t
59. maintenance of the frequency inverter Daily check items 1 Check if the sound is normal during the running of the motor Check if there is a vibration during the running of the motor Check whether the installation environment of frequency inverter has changed Check if the cooling fan of frequency inverter is working correctly the cooling air duct is clear Check if the frequency inverter is overheating Make sure that the frequency inverter should always be kept in a clean state U DAU RAUN Clear up effectively the dust on the surface of the frequency inverter prevent the dust from entering into the inside of the frequency inverter especially for the metal dust 8 Clear up effectively the oil and dust on the cooling fan of frequency inverter 2 7 2 Regular inspection Please regularly check frequency inverter especially for the difficult checking place of running Regular inspection items 1 Check the air duct and clear up regularly 2 Check if there are any loose screws 3 Check if the inverter has been corroded 4 To do insulation test for the main circuit 5 Check if the terminals have arcing mark Note When using the megger please use the DC 500V meg ohm meter to measure the insulation resistance you shall disconnect the main circuit to the frequency inverter Do not use the insulation resistance meter to test the control circuit Do not to do the high voltage test It has been done when the frequ
60. may be performed in conjunction with this chapter EMHEATER will assume no liability or responsibility for any injury or loss caused by improper operation 1 1 Safety Information 1 1 1 Before installation A Danger Do not use damaged or missing components frequency inverter Failure to comply will result in personal injury Please use the electric motor with upper B insulation class Failure to comply will result in personal injury 1 1 2 During installation A Danger Install the frequency inverter on incombustible objects such as metal and keep it away from combustible materials Failure to comply may result in a fire A Warning When two frequency inverters are laid in the same cabinet arrange the installation positions properly to ensure the enough cooling effect Do not drop wire residue or screw into the frequency inverter Failure to comply will result in damage to the frequency inverter 1 1 3 wiring A Danger Wiring must be performed only by qualified personnel under instructions described in this manual Failure to comply may result in unexpected accidents Acircuit breaker must be used to isolate the power supply and the frequency inverter Failure to comply may result in a fire Ensure that the power supply is cut off before wiring Failure to comply may result in electric shock Connect the frequency inverter to ground properly by standard Failure to comply may result in electric shoc
61. ml V O W 13 Three phase AC power output terminals 3 8 1 3 Main Circuit Terminals Sketch of Three phase 220V 380V Middle and Big Power Standard Models Including model Three phase 220V EM11 G2 011 EM11 G2 075 Three phase 380V EM11 G3 018 P3 022 EM11 G3 400 P3 450 Rit Sa2 Tas P P P E Uri Vit2 Wms POWER T OPTION MOTOR Terminal symbol Function description R0 S42 Ths Three phase AC power input terminals PO P Connecting terminals of external DC reactor Normally short circuited with copper bar P 0 P DC power input terminals DC output terminals of external braking unit U T10 V T20 W T3 Three phase AC power output terminals DE Grounding terminal 23 24 EM11 User s Manual 3 Installation of Frequency Inverter 3 8 1 4 Main Circuit Terminals Sketch of Model with optional internal braking units Including model Three phase 220V EM11 G2 011 EM11 G2 037 Three phase 380V EM11 G3 018 P3 022 EM11 G3 075 P3 090 Rui Sa2 Tas PB Pt P E Uri Vr Wrs POWER OPTION MOTOR Terminal symbol Function description R L1j S L20 T L3 Three phase AC power input terminals P P DC power input terminals P PB Braking resistor connecting U T10 V T20 W T3 Three phase AC power output terminals E Grounding terminal Note
62. of pulse output Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b6 04 AO1 offset coefficient 100 0 100 0 0 0 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b6 05 AOI gain 10 00 10 00 1 00 b6 06 AO offset coefficient 100 0 100 0 0 00 b6 07 AO2 gain 10 00 10 00 1 00 These parameters are used to correct the zero drift of analog output and the output amplitude deviation They can also be used to define the desired AO curve If b represents zero offset k represents gain Y represents actual output and X represents standard output the actual output is Y kX b The zero offset coefficient 100 of AO1 and AO2 corresponds to 10 V or 20 mA The standard output refers to the value corresponding to the analog output of 0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA with no zero offset or gain adjustment For example if the analog output is used as the running frequency and it is expected that the output is 8 V when the frequency is 0 and 3 V at the maximum frequency the gain shall be set to 0 50 and the zero offset shall be set to 80 5 8 Group b7 Virtual digital input VDI digital output VDO terminals Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b7 00 VDI function selection 0 49 0 b7 01 VDI2 function selection 0 49 0 b7 02 VDI3 function selection 0 49 0 b7 03 VDI4 function selection 0 49 0 b7 04 VDIS5 function se
63. on the actual situation setting of rated current is too small 7 2 Common Faults and Solutions You may come across the following faults during the use of the frequency inverter Refer to the following table for simple fault analysis Table 8 2 Troubleshooting to common faults of the frequency inverter is faulty 5 The cable connecting the control board loose or breaks 4 The control board or the operation panel and the drive board and the operation panel SN Fault Possible Causes Solutions 1 There is no power supply to the frequency inverter or the power input to the frequency inverter is too low 2 The power supply of the switch on the 1 Check the power supply drive board of the frequency inverter is A 2 Check the DC bus voltage 1 Thiere is no display at faulty 3 Check the internal wiring plu power on 3 The rectifier bridge is damaged 8 Pius 4 Change a keypad 5 Ask for technical support coc is displayed 1 The cable between the drive board and the control board is in poor contact are damaged 2 Related components on the control board 1 Checking wiring inverter display is normal after 4 power on But coc is displayed after running and stops immediately 1 The cooling fan is damaged or locked rotor occurs 2 The external control terminal cable is short circuited 2 i 3 The motor or the motor cable is short j at power on circuited t
64. resistance 0 001 Q 65 535 Q frequency inverter powers 55 kW Model asynchronous motor 0 0001 Q 6 5535 Q frequency inverter power gt 75 kW dependen d0 06 Rotor resistance 0 001 Q 65 535 Q Frequency inverter powers 55 kW Model asynchronous motor 0 0001 Q 6 5535 Q frequency inverter power gt 75 kW dependen Leakage inductive 0 01mH 655 35 mH frequency inverter powers 55 kW Model d0 07 reactance 0 001mH 65 535 mH frequency inverter power gt 75 dependen asynchronous motor kW Mutual inductive 0 1mH 6553 5 mH Frequency inverter powers 55 kW Model d0 08 reactance 0 01mH 655 35 mH Frequency inverter power gt 75 dependen asynchronous motor kW Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 40 09 No load current 0 01A d0 02 Frequency inverter power lt 55 kW Model asynchronous motor 0 1A to d0 02 Frequency inverter power gt 75 kW dependent The parameters in d0 05 d0 09 are asynchronous motor parameters These parameters are unavailable on the motor nameplate and are obtained by means of motor auto tuning Only d0 05 d0 07 can be obtained through static motor auto tuning Through complete motor auto tuning encoder phase sequence and current loop PI can be obtained besides the parameters in d0 05 d0 09 When the Rated motor power d0 00 or Rated motor voltage d0 01 is changed the frequency inverter automatically restores values of d0 05 d0 09 to restore setting of
65. setting source 4 Pulse setting DI6 5 6 7 d1 26 i in torque control Communication setting MIN AIL AI2 MAX AIl AI2 Full range of values 1 7 corresponds to the digital setting of d1 27 Torque digital setting d1 27 200 0 200 0 100 0 in torque control The d1 26 is used to set the torque setting source There are a total of eight torque setting sources The torque setting is a relative value 100 0 corresponds to the frequency inverter s rated torque The setting range is 200 0 200 0 indicating the frequency inverter s maximum torque is twice of the frequency inverter s rated torque If the torque setting is positive the frequency inverter rotates in forward direction If the torque setting is negative the frequency inverter rotates in reverse direction 107 108 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes 0 Digital setting d1 27 The target torque directly uses the value set in d1 27 1 AT1 2 AI2 3 AI3 The target torque is decided by analog input The EM11 control board provides two AI terminals AI1 AI2 Another AI terminal AI3 is provided by the I O extension card All is 0V 10 V voltage input AI2 is 0V 10 V voltage input or 4mA 20mA current input decided by jumper on the control board and AI3 is 10 V 10 V voltage input For the details of AI Curve setting please refer to the description of analog input parameters When AI is us
66. synchronous 50 500 100 motor Maximum current of pei PM field weakening LESS ae PM Field weakening d1 24 automatic adjustment 0 10 5 00 1 00 gain d1 25 PM Field weakening 2 10 2 integral multiple These parameters are used to set field weakening control for the synchronous motor If dl 21 is set to 0 field weakening control on the synchronous motor is disabled In this case the maximum rotational speed is related to the frequency inverter DC bus voltage If the motor s maximum rotational speed cannot meet the requirements enable the field weakening function to increase the speed The EM11 provides two field weakening modes direct calculation and automatic adjustment In direct calculation mode directly calculate the demagnetized current and manually adjust the demagnetized current by parameter d1 22 The smaller the demagnetized current is the smaller the total output current is However the desired field weakening effect may not be achieved In automatic adjustment mode the best demagnetized current is selected automatically This may influence the system dynamic performance or cause instability The adjustment speed of the field weakening current can be changed by modifying the values of d1 24 and d1 25 A very quick adjustment may cause instability Therefore generally do not modify them manually Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Digital setting d1 27 1 All 2 AI2 3 AI3 Torque
67. to the interval time from the inverter finishes receiving data to response data back to the host machine If the response delay is less than the system processing time then the response time is based on the time of the system processing If the response delaying time is more than the system processing time after the system processes the data it should be delayed to wait until the response delay time is reached and then sending back data to host machine Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default E Ai 0 0s invalid bags OMRON l T6005 0 0s npon Valid for Modbus When this parameter is set to 0 0s the communication interface timeout function is invalid When the function code is set to a value if the interval time between this communication and the next communication is beyond the communication timeout the system will report communication failure error 80 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes Errl6 At normal application it will be set as invalid If in the continuous communication system setting this parameter you can monitor the communication status Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Modbus protocol Unit s digit Modbus protocol bA 06 data transmission 0 Non standard Modbus protocol 1 format selection 1 Standard Modbus protocol bA 06 1 Select standard Modbus protocol bA 06 0 When reading the command the slave machine return is one by
68. value causes great fluctuation of DC bus voltage during the braking process Same as unit s digit in bb 32 Unit s digit Speed deviation too large Err42 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Same as unit s digit in bb 32 Dat 0 Disabled Fault protection Ten s digit Motor over speed Err43 bb 35 i ra gigi 00000 Moal Rapi current mit 1 Enabled action selection 4 Same as unit s digit in bb 32 The rapid current limit function can reduce the frequency inverter over current faults at maximum Hundreds digit Initial position fault Err51 guaranteeing uninterrupted running of the frequency inverter Same as unit s digit in bb 32 ne pr However long time rapid current limit may cause the frequency inverter to overheat which is not allowed If free stop is selected the frequency inverter displays Err and directly stops In this case the frequency inverter will report Err40 indicating the frequency inverter is overloaded and If Stop according to the stop mode is selected the frequency inverter displays A and stops according needs to stop to the stop mode After stop the frequency inverter displays Err If Continue to run is selected the frequency inverter continues to run and displays A The running 87 88 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes frequency is set in bb 36 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Current running frequency Frequency select
69. 0 1 same as FMR Ten thousand s digit DO2 valid mode 0 1 same as FMR It is used to set the logic of output terminals FMR relay DO1 and DO2 0 Positive logic The output terminal is valid when being connected with COM and invalid when being disconnected from COM 1 Positive logic The output terminal is invalid when being connected with COM and valid when being disconnected from COM Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F detecti I b4 22 eee ee ver 0 00 Hz maximum frequency 50 00 Hz FDT1 Frequency detection hysteresis b4 23 0 0 100 0 FDT1 level 5 09 FDT hysteresis 1 Ail evel o If the running frequency is higher than the value of b4 22 the corresponding DO terminal becomes ON If 63 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual the running frequency is lower than value of b4 22 the DO terminal goes OFF These two parameters are respectively used to set the detection value of output frequency and hysteresis value of cancellation of the output The value of b4 23 is a percentage of the hysteresis frequency to the frequency detection value b4 22 The FDT function is shown in the following figure Output Frequency A Hz y FDT hysteresis E b4 22 b4 23 FDT level gt Time t Frequency reached A Detection signal ON D0 relay gt Time t Diagram 5 14 FDT level Code Parameter Name Setting Rang
70. 0 High level valid 1 Low level valid Valid state selection fi b7 10 219 Sate Selection TOT Ton s digit A12 0 0 AI used as DI sty Agee 0 1 same as unit s digit Hundred s digit AI3 0 1 same as unit s digit b7 11 VDO1 function 0 connect with physical DIx internally 38 0 selection 38 b7 12 VDO2 funetign 0 connect with physical DIx internally 38 0 selection 38 b7 13 VDO3 function 0 connect with physical Dix internally 38 0 selection 38 b7 14 VDO4 function 0 connect with physical Dix internally 38 0 selection 38 b7 15 VDO5 funcao 0 connect with physical Dix internally 38 0 selection 38 b7 16 VDOI output delay _ 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s a b7 17 VDO2 output delay _ 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s a b7 18 VDO3 output delay _ 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s 0 b7 19 VDO4 output delay _ 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s 0 b7 20 VDOS output delay _ 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s a 156 EM11 User s Manual Appendix II Code Parameter Name Setting range Default _ Property Unit s digit VDO1 0 Positive logic valid 1 Reverse logic valid Ten s digit VDO2 x 0 1 same as unit s digit VDO valid stat b7 21 ee basi a Hundred s digit VDO3 00000 0 0 1 same as unit s digit Thousand s digit VDO4 0 1 same as unit s digit Ten thousand s digit VDOS 0 1 same as unit s digit Group b8 AI AO Correction Ideal voltage of AI1 b8 00 ao cE 0 500 4 000 V 2 000V 0 calibration 1 ps o1 Sampling voltage of
71. 00 100 00 e frequency U0 47 Present running 100 00 100 00 p e frequency U0 48 Frequency inverter 065535 i running state Sent value of U0 49 point point 100 00 100 00 e communication 179 Appendix IT EM11 User s Manual Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property Received value of U0 50 point point 100 00 100 00 a communication Group AO System Parameters A0 00 User password 0 65535 0 0 Model A0 01 Product number Frequency inverter product number e dependent Model A0 02 Software version Software version of control board dependent Model A0 03 Rated current ose e dependent Model A0 04 Rated voltage one e dependent A0 07 Parameter modification 0 Modifiable 0 T property 1 Not modifiable Unit s digit User defined parameter QUICK display selection Individualized Not display A0 08 arameter displa 1 Display 0 o 4 PAY Ten s digit User changed parameter QUICK property f display selection 0 Not display 1 Display 0 No operation 1 Restore default settings except motor parameters and accumulation record A0 09 Restore default settings 2 Restore default settings for all parameters 0 il 3 Reserve 4 Clear records Other Reserve Group A1 User defined Parameters defined functi A1 00 Usersdefined funtion User visible function codes ub0 01 o
72. 00s 1 00s Switchover frequency d1 06 2 d1 03 maximum output frequency 10 00 Hz Speed loop PI parameters vary with running frequencies of the frequency inverter Ifthe running frequency is less than or equal to Switchover frequency 1 d1 03 the speed loop PI parameters are d1 01 and d1 02 Ifthe running frequency is equal to or greater than Switchover frequency 2 d1 06 the speed loop PI parameters are d1 04 and d1 05 If the running frequency is between d1 03 and d1 06 the speed loop PI parameters are obtained from the linear switchover between the two groups of PI parameters as shown in Diagram 6 30 PI parameters D1 01 D1 02 D1 04 D1 05 OO gt Running frequencies D1 03 D1 06 Diagram 5 30 Relationship between running frequencies and PI parameters The speed dynamic response characteristics in vector control can be adjusted by setting the proportional gain and integral time of the speed regulator To achieve a faster system response increase the proportional gain and reduce the integral time Be aware that this may lead to system oscillation The recommended adjustment method is as follows If the factory setting cannot meet the requirements make proper adjustment Increase the proportional gain first to ensure that the system does not oscillate and then reduce the integral time to ensure that the system has quick response and small overshoot Note Improper PI parameter set
73. 1 G2 037 250 160 50 35 1 0 EM11 G2 045 250 160 70 35 1 0 EM11 G2 055 350 350 120 120 0 EM11 G2 075 500 400 185 185 0 Three phase 380V EM11 G3 d75 P3 1d5 10 10 2 5 2 5 1 0 EM11 G3 1d5 P3 2d2 16 10 2 5 2 5 1 0 EM11 G3 2d2 P3 004 16 10 2 5 2 5 1 0 EM11 G3 004 P3 5d5 25 16 4 0 4 0 1 0 EM11 G3 5d5 P3 7d5 32 25 4 0 4 0 1 0 EM11 G3 7d5 P3 011 40 32 4 0 4 0 1 0 EM11 G3 011 P3 015 63 40 4 0 4 0 1 0 EM11 G3 015 P3 018 63 40 6 0 6 0 1 0 EM11 G3 018 P3 022 100 63 6 6 1 0 EM11 G3 022 P3 030 100 63 10 10 1 0 EM11 G3 030 P3 037 125 100 16 10 1 0 EM11 G3 037 P3 045 160 100 16 16 1 0 EM11 G3 045 P3 055 200 125 25 25 1 0 EM11 G3 055 P3 075 250 125 35 25 1 0 EM11 G3 075 P3 090 250 160 50 35 1 0 3 Installation of Frequency Inverter EM11 User s Manual 2 Cable of Input Side Cable of Output Cable of Frequency inverter MCCB Contactor i HAR A R D KAN Model A A Main Creat Side Main pce Control ui mm mm mm EM11 G3 090 P3 110 350 160 70 35 1 0 EM11 G3 110 P3 132 350 350 120 120 1 0 EM11 G3 132 P3 160 400 400 150 150 1 0 EM11 G3 160 P3 200 500 400 185 185 1 0 EM11 G3 200 P3 220 630 600 150 2 150 2 1 0 EM11 G3 220 P3 250 630 600 150 2 150 2 1 0 EM11 G3 250 P3 280 800 600 185 2 185 2 1 0 EM11 G3 280 P3 315 800 800 185 2 185 2 1 0 EM11 G3 315 P3 355 1000 800 150 3 150 3 1 0 EM11 G3 355 P3 400 1000 800 150 4
74. 1 code 15 User defined functi Al 16 SOR ct User visible function codes uA0 00 code 16 Al1 17 Uoer detiied mnch User visible function codes uA0 00 code 17 Al 18 Deets dosted fuiction User visible function codes uA0 00 code 18 defined functi Al 19 Tee ee funictiorn User visible function codes uA0 00 code 19 A1 20 Voer dstied tinenon User visible function codes uA0 00 code 20 User defined functi Al 21 See eee unenon User visible function codes uA0 00 code 21 Al1 22 User defined funetion User visible function codes uA0 00 code 22 User defined functi A1 23 ser qehinec uneton User visible function codes uA0 00 code 23 A1 24 Ver Senco on User visible function codes uA0 00 code 24 defined functi A1 25 User defined functio User visible function codes uA0 00 code 25 defined functi Al 26 Dpeesietines function User visible function codes uA0 00 code 26 defined functi Al 27 per detned fuinction User visible function codes uA0 00 code 27 User defined functi A1 28 Sooo een User visible function codes uA0 00 code 28 defined functi Al 29 User defined function User visible function codes uA0 00 code 29 User defined functi A1 30 Sergehned unean heer visible function codes uA0 00 code 30 defined functi A1 31 User detmed function User visible function codes uA0 00 code 31 Group A1 is user defined parameter group You can select the required parameters from all EM11 functions codes and add them into this group conv
75. 1 2d2 Three phase 220V EM11 G2 d75 EM11 G2 1d5 EM11 G2 2d2 160 148 247 235 177 5 5 EM11 G2 004 EM11 G2 5d5 220 126 349 334 194 7 EM11 G2 7d5 EM11 G2 011 290 230 455 440 218 07 EM11 G2 015 EM11 G2 018 320 230 555 540 240 010 EM11 G2 022 EM11 G2 030 410 320 635 610 239 12 EM11 G2 037 EM11 G2 045 460 320 654 630 340 12 EM11 G2 055 EM11 G2 075 560 420 847 820 348 014 Three phase 380V EM11 G3 d75 P3 1d5 EM11 G3 1d5 P3 2d2 118 106 5 185 175 5 157 04 5 EM11 G3 2d2 P3 004 EM11 G3 004 P3 5d5 EM11 G3 5d5 P3 7d5 160 148 247 235 177 05 5 EM11 G3 7d5 P3 011 Diagram 2 5 Appearance and installation dimension of EM11 series Metal housing structure EM11 G3 011 P3 015 220 126 349 334 194 07 The housing types of the EM11 models are listed in the following table EM11 G3 015 P3 018 EM11 User s Manual 2 Product Information Appearance and installing dimension mm Ww wi H H1 D d Model EM11 G3 018 P3 022 EM11 G3 022 P3 030 290 230 455 440 218 97 EM11 G3 030 P3 037 EM11 G3 037 P3 045 320 230 555 540 240 010 EM11 G3 045 P3 055 EM11 G3 055 P3 075 410 320 635 610 239 p12 EM11 G3 075 P3 090 EM11 G3 090 P3 110 460 320 654 630 340 012 EM11 G3 110 P3 132 EM11 G3 132 P3 160 EM11 G3 160 P3 200 560 420 847 820 348 014 EM11 G3 200 P3 220 EM11 G3 220 P3 250 EM11 G3 250 P3 280 700 520 956 920 368 014 EM11 G3 280 P3 315 EM11 G3
76. 10 00 V 0 p5 42 Comesponding setting 100 00 100 0 100 0 o of AI3 maximum input b5 43 AI3 filter time 0 00 10 00s 0 10s 0 ps 44 UMP Point of AB input i00 00 100 0 0 0 o corresponding setting Jump amplitude of AI3 b5 45 input corresponding 0 0 100 0 0 5 0 setting Group b6 Pulse Analog Output Terminals 0 Running frequency corresponding to 0 Max operation frequency 1 Set frequency corresponding to 0 Max operation frequency 2 Output current corresponding to 16 00 EMP fictio selection PONY ed motor rated cuirent 0 0 3 Output torque absolute value corresponding to 0 double rated torque 4 Output power corresponding to 0 Doubled motor rated power 5 Output voltage corresponding to 0 1 2 times DC bus voltage 154 EM11 User s Manual Appendix II Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property 6 Motor rotational speed corresponding to 0 Max operation frequency 7 Output current corresponding to 0 1000A AOI output function 8 Output voltage corresponding to 0 1000V b6 01 0 o selection 9 Output torque corresponding to 200 200 motor rated torque 0 Pulse input corresponding to 0Hz 100kHz 1 AIl corresponding to 0 10V 2 AI2 corresponding to 0 10V 3 AI3 corresponding to 0 10V 4 Length corresponding to 0 Length b6 02 A02 output function setting value l 1 T selection 5 Count value corresponding to 0 Count setting value 6 Communica
77. 11 User s Manual You can change the direction of the frequency inverter running by using the MF K key It is valid only when the present command source is operation panel control 3 Forward JOG You can perform forward JOG FJOG by using the MF K key 4 Reverse JOG You can perform reverse JOG FJOG by using the MF K key Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b9 02 LED display running parameters 1 0000 FFFF 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Running frequency 1 Hz Setting frequency Hz Bus voltage V Output voltage V Output current A Output power KW Output torque DI input status ____ DO output status ALI voltage V AI2 voltage V AI3 voltage V Count value Length value Load speed display PID setting If a parameter needs to be displayed during the running set the corresponding bit to 1 and set b9 02 to the hexadecimal equivalent of this binary number Ox1f b9 03 LED display running parameters 2 0000 FFFF 7 ls 4 3 l2 fo0 PID feedback PLC stage Pulse setting frequency kHz Running frequency 2 Remaining running time AIl voltage before correction AI2 voltage before correction ALB voltage before correction If a parameter needs to be disp
78. 19 VDO4 output delay 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s b7 20 VDOS output delay 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s Unit s digit VDO1 0 Positive logic valid 1 Reverse logic valid Ten s digit VDO2 0 1 same as unit s digit b7 21 VDO valid state selection Hundred s digit VDO3 00000 0 1 same as unit s digit Thousand s digit VDO4 0 1 same as unit s digit Ten thousand s digit VDOS 0 1 same as unit s digit VDO functions are similar to the DO functions on the control board The VDO can be used together with VDI x to implement some simple logic control If VDO function is set to 0 the state of VDO1 to VDOS is determined by the state of DII to DIS on the control board In this case VDOx and DIx are one to one mapping relationship If VDO function is set to non 0 the function setting and use of VDOx are the same as DO in group b4 The VDOx state valid can be set in b7 21 The application examples of VDIx involved the usage of VDOx and please see these examples for your reference 73 74 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes 5 9 Group b8 AI AO Correction Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b8 00 Heal yee SRAN 0 500 4 000 V 2 000V calibration 1 b8 01 Sampling voltage OFA 0 500 4 000 V 2 000V calibration 1 b8 02 Ideal voltage of AT 6 000 9 999 V 8 000V calibration 2 b8 03 Sampling voltage oE ATI 6 000 9 999 V 8 000V calibration 2 b8 04 I
79. 1_ 4 DU as FWD raat i 48510 J HH Default 4 4 i MODBUS interface Multi function input 2 i _DI2 asREV AY e dka i EL O1 output Multi function input 3 La DI3 reat 0 10V 0 20mA E E ii os AO2 output Multi function input 4 4 DI4 reat H wi AO1I 010V Multi function input 5 4 pI hy 1 V GND Select AO1as voltage aes Me oo ee ee or current type by J6 High speed ulse input m 4 DI6 HDI AY ans 9 FM _ High speed COM i a pulse output 0 COM aa AA Multi functional J f en collector Al sig dO open co L output AI2 JS F a Multi functional j Analog input dl CME bipolar open L0 10V 0 20mA gt GND I V collector output COMY terminals Z Select voltage or L current giving by J5 gt TA JP1 J8 J9 io Terminal PG eee p TB Relay output 1 expansion expansion expansion p Tc Diagram 3 11 Control Circuit and Main Circuit Wiring 27 3 Installation of Frequency Inver er EM11 User s Manual 3 10 2 Control Circuit Term inal Layout SISI SY SIDIS SIIIHIYIS SHIH BIY 10V All AOI 485 DU D2 DB DI4 DIS HDI TA TB TC GND AI2 AO2 485 GND COM CME COM 24V COM FM DOI COM Diagram 3 12 EM1 Control Circuit Terminal Sketch Map 3 10 3 Description of cont
80. 2 ON delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s DO2 OFF delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s oO ooo oo jo b4 20 DO logic selection 1 Unit s digit FMR valid mode 0 Positive logic 1 Negative logic Ten s digit Relay 1 valid mode 0 1 same as FMR Hundred s digit Relay 2 valid mode 0 1 same as FMR Thousand s digit DO1 valid mode 0 1 same as FMR Ten thousand s digit DO2 valid mode 0 1 same as FMR 00000 b4 21 DO logic selection 2 Unit s digit DO3 valid mode 0 Positive logic 1 Negative logic Ten s digit D04 valid mode 0 1 same as FMR Hundred s digit DOS valid mode 0 1 same as FMR Thousand s digit DO6 valid mode 0 1 same as FMR Ten thousand s digit reserved 00000 b4 22 Frequency detection value FDT1 0 00 Hz maximum frequency 50 00 Hz b4 23 Frequency detection hysteresis FDT hysteresis 1 0 0 100 0 FDT1 level 5 0 Appendix II EM11 User s Manual 151 Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property b4 24 ae a 10n 0 00Hz maximum frequency 50 00 Hz a Frequency detection b4 25 hysteresis FDT 0 0 100 0 FDT2 level 5 0 0 hysteresis 2 Detection amplitude of A 3 F b4 26 frequency reached 0 00 100 maximum frequency 3 0 o0 Any fi hi b4 27 ny ieee reac 8 10 00 Hz maximum fr
81. 23 BB 21 2 Decelerate to stop gt Time t Diagram 5 24 Frequency inverter action diagram of instantaneous power failure Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 No temperature sensor 1 PT100 0 2 PT1000 Type of motor temperature sensor bb 25 bb 26 Motor overheat ose ope 120 C protection threshold Motor overheat bb 27 pre warning 0 C 200 C 100 C threshold The signal of the motor temperature sensor needs to be connected to the optional I O extension card This card is an optional component PG card also can be used for the temperature signal input with motor over temperature protection function Please contact with manufacturer or distributors The PG card interface of the EM11 supports both PT100 and PT1000 Set the sensor type correctly during the use You can view the motor temperature via parameter U0 34 If the motor temperature exceeds the value set in bb 26 the frequency inverter reports an alarm and acts according to the selected fault protection action If the motor temperature exceeds the value set in bb 27 the DO terminal of frequency inverter set with motor overheat warning becomes ON 86 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual
82. 315 P3 355 EM11 G3 355 P3 400 800 620 1232 1200 378 018 EM11 G3 400 P3 450 2 5 3 Appearance and installation dimension of external keypad keypad tray Tl J pE 5 J 5 E 3 3 S Diagram 2 6 Appearance and installation dimension of external keypad keypad tray 2 6 Options Please indicate if the following options are needed when placing order pa Product Information EM11 User s Manual Table 2 4 Options of EM11 frequency inverter Item Model Functions Remarks Single phase 0 4kw 2 2kw The internal braking Internal With B after the M j i Three phase 0 75kw 15kw Standard unit is optional for braking unit product model built in brake unit 18 5kw 75kw External External braking unit for above braking unit 75kw including 75kw Energy saving product makes the electric Energy rege i energy of frequency inverter feedback to neration unit the AC power grid Rectifying To use the unit when many frequency unit inverters use the one DC bus the way can save energy 2 7 Daily maintenance of frequency inverters 2 7 1 Daily maintenance Due to the influence of temperature humidity dust and vibration it will lead to poor heat dissipation and component aging of frequency inverter and results in potential failure or reducing the service life of frequency inverter Therefore it is necessary to do daily and regular
83. 35 Q Frequency inverter 43 15 Stator resistance power lt 55 kW Model T synchronous motor 0 00019 6 5535 Q Frequency inverter dependent power gt 75 kW 0 01mH 655 35 mH Frequency inverter 43 16 Shaft D inductance power lt 55 kW Model T synchronous motor 0 001mH 65 535 mH Frequency inverter dependent power gt 75 kW ShattQ inductee 0 01mH 655 35 mH Frequency inverter Model B l synchronous motor powers 33KW dependent 0 0 001mH 65 535 mH Frequency inverter Appendix II EM11 User s Manual 173 Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property power gt 75 kW Back EMF Model d3 18 p 0 1V 6553 5 V le 0 synchronous motor dependent Encod 1 3 19 Meare R ners BE M30767 1024 0 revolution 0 ABZ incremental encoder 1 Resolver d3 20 Encoder type 2 UVW incremental encoder 0 0 3 Reversed 4 Wire saving UVW encoder A B phase sequence of d3 21 ABZ incremental Forward 0 0 1 Reserve encoder 43 22 Encoder installation 0 0 359 9 0 0 0 angle U V W phase sequence 0 Forward Gee of UVW encoder 1 Reverse 9 I VW d 1 43 24 UVW encoder angle l6 0o 359 90 0 0 0 offset 43 28 Number of pole pairs of 1 99 1 T resolver Encoder wire break 0 0s No action 93 22 fault detection time 0 1s 10 0s a I 0 No auto tuning 1 Asynchronous motor static auto tuning Motor 2 auto tuning 2 Asynchronou
84. 4 Operation and display Motor Parameter b0 00 Motor Type Selection d0 00 Motor Rated Power Motor 1 d0 01 Motor Rated Voltage d0 02 Motor Rated Current d0 03 Motor Rated Frequency d0 04 Motor Rated Speed b0 00 Motor Type Selection d2 00 Motor Rated Power Motor 2 d2 01 Motor Rated Voltage d2 02 Motor Rated Current d2 03 Motor Rated Frequency d2 04 Motor Rated Speed AC asynchronous motor tuning If the motor can be disconnected from the load then please set d0 30 d2 30 to 2 asynchronous motor complete auto tuning then press the RUN key on the keypad The frequency inverter will automatically calculate the following parameters of motor Motor Parameter d0 05 Stator resistance asynchronous motor d0 06 Rotor resistance asynchronous motor Motor 1 d0 07 Leakage inductive reactance asynchronous motor d0 08 Mutual inductive reactance asynchronous motor d0 09 No load current asynchronous motor d2 05 Stator resistance asynchronous motor d2 06 Rotor resistance asynchronous motor Motor 2 d2 07 Leakage inductive reactance asynchronous motor d2 08 Mutual inductive reactance asynchronous motor d2 09 No load current asynchronous motor Finish motor parameter auto tuning If the motor cannot be fully disconnected with the load then please select d0 30 d2 30 as 1 asynchronous static auto tuning and press the RUN key in the keypad panel And
85. 4000 0x42FF b0 bC 0xA300 OxAFFF 0x4300 Ox4FFF C0 C6 0xb000 0xB7FF 0x5000 0x57FF d0 d6 0xB800 OxBEFF 0x5800 OxSEFF U0 0x7000 0x70FF Besides due to EEPROM be frequently stored it will reduce the lifetime of EEPROM In the communication mode and some function codes don t have to be stored as long as change the RAM value Stop start parameter pamer Parameter description Eana Parameter description Communication set value 10000 PID setting 000 10000 Decimal 1010 1001 Running frequency 1011 PID feedback 1002 DC Bus voltage 1012 PLC process 003 Output voltage 1013 Pulse input frequency unit 0 01 KHz 1004 Output current 1014 Feedback speed unit 0 1Hz 1005 Output power 1015 Remaining running time 006 Output torque 1016 Voltage before All correction 1007 Running speed 1017 Voltage before Al2correction 008 DI input terminal 1018 Voltage before Al3correction 009 DO output terminal 1019 Linear speed 100A AIl voltage 101A Present power on time 00B AI voltage 101B Present running time 00C AB voltage 101C Pulse input frequency unit 1Hz 100D Counting value input 101D Communication setting value 00E Length value input 101E Actual feedback speed 100F Load speed 101F Main frequency X display 1020 Auxiliary frequency Y display Note Communication setting value is the percentage of relative value 10000 corresponds to 100 10000 correspond to
86. 45 EM11 G3 015 EM11 P3 015 15 20 35 32 21 0 553 EM11 G3 018 EM11 P3 018 18 5 25 38 5 37 24 0 651 EM11 G3 022 EM11 P3 022 22 30 46 5 45 30 0 807 EM11 G3 030 EM11 P3 030 30 40 62 60 40 1 01 EM11 G3 037 EM11 P3 037 37 50 76 75 57 1 20 EM11 G3 045 EM11 P3 045 45 60 92 91 69 1 51 EM11 G3 055 EM11 P3 055 55 75 113 112 85 1 80 EM11 G3 075 EM11 P3 075 715 100 157 150 114 1 84 EM11 G3 090 EM11 P3 090 90 125 180 176 134 2 08 EM11 G3 110 EM11 P3 110 110 150 214 210 160 2 55 EM11 G3 132 EM11 P3 132 132 200 256 253 192 3 06 EM11 G3 160 EM11 P3 160 160 250 307 304 231 3 6 EM11 G3 200 EM11 P3 200 200 300 385 377 250 4 42 EM11 G3 220 EM11 P3 220 220 300 430 426 280 4 87 EM11 G3 250 EM11 P3 250 250 400 468 465 355 5 5 EM11 G3 280 EM11 P3 280 280 370 525 520 396 6 2 EM11 G3 315 EM11 P3 315 315 500 590 585 445 7 03 EM11 G3 355 EM11 P3 355 355 420 665 650 500 7 8 EM11 G3 400 EM11 P3 400 400 530 785 725 565 8 5 EM11 P3 450 450 600 883 820 630 9 23 2 4 Technical Specifications Table 2 2 Technical specifications of EM11 Item Specifications Standard functions Maximum frequency Vector control 0 300 Hz V F control 0 3000 Hz Carrier frequency 0 5 16 kHz The carrier frequency is automatically adjusted based on the load features Input frequency resolution Digital setting 0 01 Hz Analog setting maximum frequ
87. 5 kW Mode q synchronous motor 0 001 mH 65 535 mH Frequency inverter dependent power gt 75 kW d0 18 PESEN 0 1V 6553 5 V Met D synchronous motor dependent do 1g Pucoderpulsesper 33767 1024 0 revolution 0 ABZ incremental encoder 1 Resolver d0 20 Encoder type 2 UVW incremental encoder 0 0 3 Reserved 4 Wire saving UVW encoder A B phase sequence of do 21 ABZ incremental Forward 0 D 1 Reserve encoder 40 22 Encoder installation 0 0 359 9 0 0 angle 5 40 23 U V W phase sequence 0 Forward 0 z of UVW encoder 1 Reverse E do 24 UVW encoder angle Jp oo 359 9 0 0 0 offset 40 28 Number of pole pairs of 1 99 1 q resolver Encoder wire break 0 0s No action E S fault detection time _ 0 1s 10 0s 0 08 g 0 No auto tuning d0 30 ve ee 1 Asynchronous motor static auto tuning 0 a gence 2 Asynchronous motor complete Appendix II EM11 User s Manual 169 Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property auto tuning 11 Synchronous motor with load auto tuning 12 Synchronous motor no load auto tuning Group d1 Vector Control Parameters 41 00 Speed Torque control 0 Speed control 0 T selection 1 Torque control Speed tional ar o1 eee 900P Proporhona 0 0110 00 0 30 qo gain 1 Kp1 Speed loop integral time d1 02 Til 0 01s 10 00s 0 50s 0 d1 03 Switchover frequency 1 0 00 d1 0
88. 6 Set by preset frequency b0 12 modified via terminal UP DOWN It determines the setting channel of multi function 0 You can perform convenient switchover between the setting channels When multi function or simple PLC is used as frequency source the switchover between two frequency sources can be realized easily 5 16 Group C2 Simple PLC Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Stop after the Frequency inverter runs one cycle Simple PLC running 1 Keep final values after the frequency inverter runs mode one cycle C2 00 2 Repeat after the frequency inverter runs one cycle 0 Stop after the frequency inverter runs one cycle The frequency inverter stops after running one cycle and will not start up until receiving another command 1 Keep final values after the frequency inverter runs one cycle The frequency inverter keeps the final running frequency and direction after running one cycle 2 Repeat after the frequency inverter runs one cycle The frequency inverter automatically starts another cycle after running one cycle and will not stop until receiving the stop command Simple PLC can be either the frequency source or V F separated voltage source When simple PLC is used as the frequency source whether parameter values of C1 00 C1 15 are positive or negative determines the frequency inverter running direction If the parameter values are negative it indicates that
89. 6 5 00 Hz a Speed loop proportional d1 04 0 01 10 00 0 20 gain 2 KP2 I Speed loop integral time d1 05 0 01s 10 00 1 00 X Ti2 s Z R I d1 03 i tput a d1 06 Switchover frequency 2 Sano tage 10 00 Hz 0 frequency d1 07 Speed loop integral 0 Integral separation disabled 0 0 property 1 Integral separation enabled dl 08 ASR input filtering time 0 000s 0 100s 0 000s 0 ASR output filteri di o9 ASR output filtering lO p99 0 1005 0 000s 0 time d1 10 xeito cuirent loop 0 30000 2000 proportional gain 7 d1 11 Exeitahion current loop 0 30000 1300 integral gain dita Toraue currentloop lo 30000 2000 0 proportional gain Z T t 7 d1 13 onque current o0P 0 30000 1300 integral gain 0 d1 16 1 AIl Motor running torque 2 AD dl 14 upper limit source in 9 AB 0 a speedcontolmode Sise guiding LITE 5 Communication setting 0 d1 17 1 AIl Braking torque upper ott 2 AI2 dl 15 limit source in speed 0 o control mode LAD 4 Pulse setting DI6 5 Communication setting di 16 Pisital setting of motor 004 200 0 150 0 o running torque limit Digital setting of d1 17 igna sens OF 10 0 200 0 150 0 0 braking torque limit 70 EM11 User s Manual Appendix II Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property d1 18 Motor running slip gain 50 200 100 0 dl 19 Braking slip gain 50 200 100 0 di 29 Torque limit coefficient 1 0o 100 0 40 0 0 in fie
90. 6 time bief 1 Set frequency 0 O on time base frequency 100 Hz Group b1 Start and Stop Control Parameters 0 Direct start 1 Rotational speed tracking restart b1 00 Start mod 0 eee se 2 Pre excited start AC asynchronous 0 motor 0 F fi t st Rotational speed TOR ned ak b1 01 i 1 From zero speed 0 0 tracking mode i 2 From maximum frequency Appendix II EM11 User s Manual 145 Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property b1 02 Rotational speed 1 100 20 D tracking speed b1 03 Startup frequency _ 0 00 10 00 Hz 0 00 Hz 0 biog Startup frequency 9 100 05 0 0s 0 holding time Startup DC braking b1 05 current Pre excited 0 100 0 0 current Startup DC braki 5 b1 06 EP A gt raang 0 Os 100 0s 0 0s time Pre excited time is 0 Decelerate to stop b1 07 Stop mode 0 0 1 free stop b1 08 DE braking thal 00 Hz maximum frequency 0 00 Hz 0 frequency of stopping DC braki iti z b1 09 lt orang Walling 0 0s 100 0s 0 0s 0 time of stopping DC braki tof z b1 10 parang a 10 100 0 o stopping DC braking time of a b1 11 raang nme ot 0 0s 100 0s 0 0s 0 stopping Group b2 Auxiliary Function b2 00 JOG running frequency 0 00 Hz maximum frequency 6 00 Hz 0 b2 01 JOG acceleration time 0 0s 6500 0s am 0 dependent E b2 02 JOG deceleration time 0 0s 6500 0s ae 0 dependent J Model
91. 9 999 V 8 000V Group b9 Keypad and Display b9 00 STOP RESET key function 0 STOP RESET key enabled only in operation panel control 1 STOP RESET key enabled in any operation mode b9 01 MF K Key function selection 0 MF K key disabled 1 Switchover between operation panel control and remote command control terminal or communication 2 Switchover between forward rotation and reverse rotation 3 Forward JOG 4 Reverse JOG b9 02 LED display running parameters 1 0000 FFFF Bit00 Running frequency 1 Hz BitO1 Set frequency Hz Bit02 DC Bus voltage V Bit03 Output voltage V Bit04 Output current A Bit05 Output power kW Bit06 Output torque Bit07 DI input status Bit08 DO output status Bit09 All voltage V Bit10 AI2 voltage V Bit11 AI3 voltage V Bit12 Count value Bit13 Length value Bit14 Load speed display Bit15 PID setting Ox1f 157 158 EM11 User s Manual Appendix II Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property b9 03 LED display running parameters 2 0000 FFFF Bit00 PID feedback Bit01 PLC stage Bit02 Pulse input frequency kHz Bit03 Running frequency 2 Hz Bit04 Remaining running time Bit05 AI1 voltage before calibration V Bit06 AI2 voltage before calibration V Bit07 AI3 voltage before calibration V Bit08 Linear speed Bit09 present power on time Hour
92. Bit10 present running time Min Bitl 1 Heat sink temperature display C Bit12 Communication setting value Bit13 Encoder feedback frequency Hz Bit14 Main frequency X display Hz Bit15 Auxiliary frequency Y display Hz 0x0800 b9 04 LED display parameter of stopping 0000 FFFF Bit00 Set frequency Hz Bit01 Bus voltage V Bit02 DI input status Bit03 DO output status Bit04 AIl voltage V Bit05 AI2 voltage V Bit06 AI3 voltage V Bit07 Count value Bit08 Length value Bit09 PLC stage Bit10 Load speed Bit1 1 PID setting Bit12 Pulse setting frequency kHz Bit13 Heatsink temperature display C 0x2033 b9 05 Load speed display coefficient 0 0001 6 5000 1 0000 b9 06 Number of decimal places for load speed display 0 0 decimal display 1 1 decimal display 2 2 decimal display 3 3 decimal display b9 07 Heatsink temperature 0 0 C 100 0 C 0 C b9 08 Accumulative power on time 0 65535 h Oh b9 09 Accumulative running time 0 65535 h Oh b9 10 Accumulative power consumption 0 65535 kWh 0kWh Group bA Communication Parameters bA 00 Communication type selection 0 Modbus protocol Appendix II EM11 User s Manual 159 Code Parameter Name Setting range Default _ Proper
93. C and 50 C Humidity Less than 95 RH without condensing Vibration Less than 5 9 m s2 0 6 g Storage temperature 20 C 60 C 10 EM11 User s Manual 2 Product Information 2 Product Information EM11 User s Manual 2 5 Product appearance and installation dimension Voltage amp Power Housing Type 2 5 1 Product appearance Single phase 220 V Dust guard Mounting hole 0 4 2 2 kW Plastic housing Middle cover Three phase 220 V eem Bottomicover 0 4 4 kW Plastic housing Upper cover E l _ Bottom panel 5 5 75 kW Sheet metal housing Operating panel Dust guard plate Three phase 380 V a 0 75 7 5 kW Plastic housing ZT LAT Nameplate 11 400 kW Sheet metal housing Lower cover IF f 2 5 2 Appearance and Installation Hole Dimension mm of EM11 Frequency Inverter A Table 2 3 Appearance and installation hole dimension mm of EM11 frequency inverter j Cabling board Model Appearance and installing dimension mm E on wW wi H HI D od f Single phase 220V EM11 G1 d75 EM11 G1 1d5 EM11 G
94. C0 03 PID feedback source 4 AII AI2 0 0 5 All AI2 6 MAX AI1 AI2 7 MIN AI1 AI2 8 Communication setting Pop 0 Forward action C0 04 PID action direction 0 o 1 Reverse action c0 05 PID setting feedback 0 65535 1000 0 range C0 06 Proportional gain KP1 0 00 10 0 20 0 0 C0 07 Integral time TI1 0 01s 10 00s 2 00s 0 C0 08 Differential time TD1 0 000s 10 000s 0 000s 0 C0 09 Proportional gain KP2 0 00 10 00 20 0 a C0 10 Integral time TI2 0 01s 10 00s 2 00s 0 C0 11 Differential time TD2 0 00s 10 00s 0 000s 0 0 No switchover c0 12 Rora ee 1 Switchover via DI 0 0 2 Automatic switchover based on deviation co 13 PD parameter l0 0 C0 14 20 0 0 switchover deviation 1 C0 14 PID parameter C0 13 100 0 80 0 0 64 Appendix II EM11 User s Manual EM11 User s Manual Appendix II Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property switchover deviation 2 Unit s digit Integral separated 0 Invalid 1 Valid C0 15 PID integral property Ten s digit Whether to stop integral 00 o operation when the output reaches the limit 0 Continue integral operation 1 Stop integral operation C0 16 PID initial value 0 0 100 0 0 0 0 co 17 PID initial value g 005 650 00s 0 00s D holding time C0 18 R PEN 0 00 maximum frequency 2 00 Hz 0 C0 19 PID deviation limit _ 0 0 100 0 0 0 0
95. CAL It indicates whether the frequency inverter is operated by operation keypad terminals or remoter communication OFF indicates keypad operation control state ON indicates terminals operation control state Blinking indicates remote operation control state DIR It is Forward Reversal indicator ON indicates forward rotation TRIP Tunning Torque Control Fault indicator When the indicator is ON it indicates torque control mode When the indicator is blinking slowly it indicates the auto tuning state When the indicator is blinking quickly it indicates the fault state 2 Unit indicator Hz frequency unit A Current unit V Voltage unit 3 Digital display area The 5 digit LED display is able to display the set frequency output frequency monitoring data and fault codes 4 Description of Keys on the Operation panel keypad Table 4 1 Keypad function table Key Name Function PRG ESC Programming Enter or exit menu level I Enter the menu interfaces level by level and confirm the DATA ENTER Confirmation Z parameter setting AN Increment Increase data or function code V Decrement Decrease data or function code Select the displayed parameters in turn in the stop or running state b gt Shift ner PrI and select the digit to be modified when modifying parameters RUN RUN Start the frequency inverter in the operation panel control mode Stop the frequency inverter when it is in the running sta
96. CK key All parameter display mode display the code as follows 34 EM11 User s Manual 4 Operation and display Parameter Display Mode Display Base mode dFLt User defined mode user User modified mode chGd Switching mode is as follows Pre ary a a AN Sasic sasad Pty fe ppr aliat Fotin nation TEx 50 00 ear occa Felcyercome an tz men ESTER gt ene soace Dos cana fin ca a m ace Tht me AMA Diagram 4 4 Quick viewing mode of function codes 4 4 The operation of User defined Fast Menu of Parameters User defined menu is set to facilitate user to quickly view and modify the commonly used function codes In this mode the display parameter ub0 02 is function code b0 02 User also can modify parameters value in this menu the effect is same as modifying in common menu The user defined parameters set by group Al If Al is set to A0 00 it indicates that no function codes are available The max 32 parameters can be defined in group A1 If NULL is displayed it indicates that the user defined menu is empty A total of 16 parameters are pre stored in the user defined fast menu as listed in the following table b0 01 Control mode b0 02 Command source selection b0 03 Main frequency source X selection b0 07 Frequency source selection b0 12 Preset frequency b0 21 Acceleration time b0 22 Deceleration time b3 00 DII function selection
97. Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 40 29 Encoder aa 0 0s No action Obs fault detection time 0 1s 10 0s This parameter is used to set the detecting time that a wire break faults If it is set to 0 0s the frequency inverter does not detect the encoder wire break fault If the duration time of the encoder wire break fault detected by the frequency inverter exceeds the time set in this parameter the frequency inverter reports Err20 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 No auto tuning 1 Asynchronous motor static auto tuning Motor auto tuning s d0 30 2 Asynchronous motor complete auto tuning 0 selection 11 Synchronous motor with load auto tuning 12 Synchronous motor no load auto tuning 0 No auto tuning Auto tuning is prohibited 1 Asynchronous motor static auto tuning It is applicable to scenarios where complete auto tuning cannot be performed because the asynchronous motor cannot be disconnected from the load Before performing static auto tuning properly set the motor type and motor nameplate parameters of d0 00 d0 04 firstly The frequency inverter will obtain parameters of d0 05 d0 07 by static auto tuning Action guide Set this parameter to 1 and press RUN key Then the frequency inverter starts static auto tuning 2 Asynchronous motor complete auto tuning To perform this type of auto tuning ensure that the motor is disconnected from the load D
98. EMHEATER User s Manual EM11 Series Frequency Inverter ENUEN S 13S 19 AIAUT SIHIS JIWA China EM Technology Limited Address No 80 Baomin 2 road Xixiang Bao an District Shenzhen China Phone 86 0755 29985851 Fax 86 0755 29970305 Zip code 518101 Website Http www emheater com China EM Technology Limited EM11 User s Manual Preface Preface Thank you for purchasing the EM11 series frequency inverter developed by China EM Technology Limited The high performance EM11 series vector control frequency inverter has the following features 1 Multiple voltage classes It provides coverage of single phase 220 V three phase 220 V three phase 380 V three phase 480 V three phase 690 V and three phase 1140 V 2 Support multiple motor types It supports vector control of three phase AC asynchronous motor and three phase AC permanent magnet synchronous motor PMSM 3 Diversified control modes It supports four control modes sensor less vector control SVC closed loop vector control VC and V F control and V F separately control 4 Multiple communication protocols It supports communication via Modbus RTU Profibus DP and CANopen bus 5 Multiple encoder types It supports various encoders such as differential encoder open collector encoder resolver and UVW encoders 6 Super SVC algorithm It adopts high speed response enhanced low frequency loading capacity and supports torque control of SVC
99. Length of cable between the inverter and motor If the cable between the inverter and the motor is too long the higher harmonic leakage current of the output end will produce by adverse impact on the inverter and the peripheral devices It is suggested that when the motor cable is longer than 100m output AC reactor be installed Refer to the following table for the carrier frequency setting Carrier frequency d6 00 Less than 15kHz Less than 10kHz Less than 5kHz Length of cable between the inverter and motor Less than 50m Less than 100 m More than 100m 3 Installation of Frequency Inverter EM11 User s Manual 3 9 3 Grounding Wiring The inverter will produce leakage current The higher the carrier frequency is the larger the leakage current will be The leakage current of the inverter system is more than 3 5mA and the specific value of the leakage current is determined by the use conditions To ensure the safety the inverter and the motor must be grounded The grounding resistance shall be less than 10ohm For the grounding wire diameter requirement refer to 2 6 electrotype of main circuit peripheral devices Do not share grounding wire with the welding machine and other power equipment In the applications with more than 2 inverters keep the grounding wire from forming a loop NS Correct Wrong Diagram 3 8 Grounding Wire Con
100. M11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Cut off frequency of 0 0 80 0 torque boost Actual cut off frequency Motor rated frequency d2 02 d2 02 50 0 To compensate the low frequency torque characteristics of V F control you can boost the output voltage of the frequency inverter at low frequency by modifying d2 01 If the torque boost is set to too large the motor is easily overheated and the frequency inverter easily suffers over current If the load is large and the motor startup torque is insufficient increase the value of d2 01 If the load is small decrease the value of d2 01 If it is set to 0 0 the frequency inverter performs automatic torque boost In this case the frequency inverter automatically calculates the torque boost value based on motor parameters including the stator resistance d2 02 specifies the frequency under which torque boost is valid Torque boost becomes invalid when this frequency is exceeded as shown in the following figure A Output voltage fl fb V1 Voltage of manual torque boost Vb Maximum output voltage fl Cutoff frequency of manual torque boost fb Rated running frequency Diagram 5 31 Manual torque boost Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 2 03 Multi point VE 0 00 Hz 42 05 0 00 Hz frequency 1 F1 Multi point V F d2 04 ee 0 0 100 0
101. O terminal output ON signal For example combining virtual DI DO functions to implement the function that the frequency inverter reports an alarm when the actual accumulative power on time reaches the threshold of 100 hours perform the setting as follows 1 Set virtual DII to user defined fault 1 b7 00 40 2 Set that the valid state of virtual DI1 is from virtual DO1 b7 05 0000 3 Set virtual DO1 to power on time reached b7 11 25 4 Set the accumulative power on time reach threshold to 100 h b2 20 100 h Then the frequency inverter alarm output Err27 when the accumulative power on time reaches 100 hours Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b2 21 Setting running time reach 0 65000 h Oh threshold 52 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes It is used to set the accumulative running time threshold of the Frequency inverter If the accumulative running time b9 09 reaches the value set in this parameter the corresponding DO terminal becomes ON Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 62 22 Action after running time 0 Continue to run 0 reached 1 Stop This function is used to define the action after b2 21 preset time reached Setting 0 inverter will continue work after present running time reached and set 1 the inverter will stop Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Fan working during running b2 23 Cooling fan control 0 1
102. Same as bC 03 bC 10 bC 23 status of Ist fault bC 24 Frequency inverter status of 1st fault bC 25 Power on time of 1st fault bC 26 Running time of Ist fault 5 14 Group C0 Process Control PID Function PID control is a general process control method By performing proportional integral and differential operations on the difference between the feedback signal and the target signal it adjusts the output frequency and constitutes a feedback system to stabilize the controlled counter around the target value It is applied to process control such as flow control pressure control and temperature control The following figure shows the principle block diagram of PID control 90 EM11 User s Manua 5 Description of Function Codes Lit Ti s Target h PID output arg output 6 Tdes lt gt r 1 Feedback Diagram 6 25 Principle block diagram of PID control Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 C0 01 1 All 2 AI2 c0 00 PID setting source 3 AI3 0 4 Pulse setting DI6 5 Communication setting 6 Multi function C0 01 PID digital setting 0 0 100 0 50 0 C0 00 is used to select the channel of target process PID setting The PID setting is a relative value and ranges from 0 0 to 100 0 The PID feedback is also a relative value The purpose of PID control is to make the PID setting and PID feedback
103. The swing amplitude is fixed Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default C3 01 Swing frequency 0 094100 0 0 0 amplitude Textile jump C3 02 frequency amplitude 0 0 50 0 0 0 of Swing running This parameter is used to set the jump frequency amplitude of swing running The swing frequency is limited by the frequency upper limit and frequency lower limit If swing frequency is relative to the central frequency C3 00 0 the actual swing amplitude AW b0 07 Frequency source xC3 01 Swing frequency amplitude If swing frequency is relative to the maximum frequency C3 00 1 the actual swing amplitude AW b0 13 Maximum frequency lt C3 01 Swing frequency amplitude The jump frequency is relative to the percentage of swing frequency amplitude That is to say jump frequency Swing frequency running amplitude AWxC3 02 Jump frequency amplitude If Swing frequency amplitude is relative to the central frequency C3 00 0 the jump frequency is a variable value If Swing frequency amplitude is relative to the maximum frequency C3 00 1 the jump frequency is a fixed value Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default ing fr c3 03 Swing frequency 9 15 3000 0s 10 0s cycle c3 o4 TMangularwave 9 19 100 0 50 0 rising time coefficient C3 03 specifies the time of a complete swing frequency cycle C3 04 specifies the time percentage of triangular wave rising t
104. V 10 V voltage input and the another supports 0V 10 V voltage input or 0 20 mA current input expanding capacity many DI terminals 1 AI terminal that supports 10V 10 V voltage input Output terminal Standard 1 high speed pulse output terminal open collector that supports 0 50 kHz square wave signal output 1 digital output DO terminal 1 relay output terminal 2 analog output AO terminals one of them supports 0 20 mA current output or 0V 10 V voltage output expanding capacity many DO terminals many relay output terminals Display and keypad operation LED display It displays the parameters LCD display It is optional supports panel display in Chinese or English language Parameters copy Optional LCD keypad can copy parameters Key locking and function selection It can lock the keys partially or completely and define the function range of some keys so as to prevent misoperation Protection mode Motor short circuit detection at power on input output phase loss protection over current protection overvoltage protection less voltage protection overheat protection and overload protection etc Environment Installation location Indoor no direct sunlight dust corrosive gas combustible gas oil smoke vapour drip or salt Altitude Lower than 1000 m Ambient temperature 10 C 40 C de rated if the ambient temperature is between 40
105. _ Property 1 0 1 Hz b0 11 Frequency unit 9 001 Hz 2 0 b0 12 Preset frequency 0 00 maximum frequency b0 13 50 00 Hz 0 b0 13 Maximum frequency 50 00 3000 00 Hz 50 00 Hz 0 0 Set by b0 15 1 AIl b0 14 Source of frequency 2 AI2 0 T upper limit 3 AI3 4 Pulse setting DI6 5 Communication setting _ Frequency lower limit b0 17 maximum 50 00 H b0 15 Frequency upper limit frequency b0 13 z 0 vo 16 F sae 5 er limit ls 00 Hz maximum frequency b0 13 0 00 Hz 0 offse b0 17 Frequency lower limit 0 00 Hz frequency upper limit b0 15 0 00 Hz 0 b0 18 Rotation direction 0 Forward crete 0 0 1 Reverse direction Base frequency for UP 0 R fr b0 19 DOWN modification C0008 Moquency 0 A 1 1 Setting frequency z during running 0 Linear acceleration deceleration Acceleration Decelerati 2 b0 20 ae peace na ae 1 S curve acceleration deceleration A 0 0 2 S curve acceleration deceleration B 4 0 00s 650 00s b0 25 2 Model 7 b0 21 Acceleration time 1 0 0s 6500 0s b0 25 1 d deit 0 0s 65000s b0 25 0 biaa 0 00s 650 00s b0 25 2 ee Model b0 22 Deceleration time 1 0 0s 6500 0s b0 25 1 d ent 0 0s 65000s b0 25 0 SPRA bo 23 _ ime proportion of ly 00 _ 100 0 minus b0 24 30 0 0 S curve start segment po 24 Time proportion of ly 09 100 0 minus b0 23 30 0 0 S curve end segment O 1s 60 25 ee 10 18 1 i on time uni 001s Acceleration Decelerati D Mazin freguency 60213 b0 2
106. ables and solutions There is distributed capacitance between the output cables of the inverter If the current passing the lines has higher harmonic it may cause resonance and thus result in leakage current If thermal relay is used it may generate error action The solution is to reduce the carrier frequency or install output reactor It is recommended that thermal relay not be installed before the motor when using the inverter and that electronic over current protection function of the inverter be used instead 6 3 6 Precautions for Installing EMC input filter at the input end of power supply 1 When using the inverter please follow its rated values strictly Since the filter belongs to Classification I electric appliances the metal enclosure of the filter shall be large and the metal ground of the installing cabinet shall be well earthed and have good conduction continuity Otherwise there may be danger of electric shock and the EMC effect may be greatly affected 2 Through the EMC test it is found that the filter ground must be connected with the PE end of the inverter at the same public earth Otherwise the EMC effect may be greatly affected 3 The filter shall be installed at a place close to the input end of the power supply as much as possible 127 7 Fault Diagnosis and Solution EM11 User s Manual 7 Fault Diagnosis and Solution 7 1 Fault Alarm and Countermeasures EM1I1 inverter has 35 types of warning informatio
107. ained Better performance can be achieved by adjusting speed regulator parameters in group d For the permanent magnetic synchronous motor PMSM the EM11 does not support SVC VC is used generally In some low requirements applications you can also use V F Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Keypad control LED off b0 02 Command source selection 1 Terminal control LED on 0 2 Communication control LED blinking It is used to determine the input channel of the frequency inverter control commands such as run stop forward rotation reverse rotation and jog operation You can input the commands in the following three channels 0 Keypad control LOCAL REMOT indicator off 37 38 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes Commands are given by pressing keys RUN and STOP RESET on the operation panel 1 Terminal control LOCAL REMOT indicator on Commands are given by means of multifunctional input terminals with functions such as FWD REV JOGF and JOGR 2 Communication control LOCAL REMOT indicator blinking Commands are given from host computer For more details please refer to the appendix of communication protocol Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Digital setting Preset frequency b0 12 UP DOWN modifiable no record after power off 1 Digital setting Preset frequency b0 12 UP DOWN modifiable record aft
108. al output terminals when using internal and external power supply 3 10 7 Description of Control Circuit Jumper Operation and display 4 1 Instruction of operation and display 4 2 Viewing and Modifying Function Code 4 3 Parameter Display Mode 4 4 The operation of User defined Fast Menu of Parameters 4 5 Monitoring Status Parameters 4 6 Password Setting 4 7 Motor parameter auto tuning 5 1 Group b0 Basic Function Parameters 5 2 Group b1 Start Stop Control Parameters 5 3 Group b2 Auxiliary Functions 5 4 Group b3 Input Terminals 5 5 Group b4 Output Terminals 5 6 Group b5 Pulse Analog input terminals 5 7 Group b6 Pulse analog output terminals 5 8 Group b7 Virtual digital input VDD digital output VDO terminals 5 9 Group b8 AI AO Correction 5 10 Group b9 Operation Panel and Display 5 11 Group bA Communication parameters 5 12 Group bb Fault and Protection 5 13 Group bC Fault detection Parameters 5 14 Group CO Process Control PID Function 5 15 Group C1 Multi function 5 16 Group C2 Simple PLC 5 17 Group C3 Swing Frequency Fixed Length and Count 5 18 Group d0 Motor 1 Parameters 5 19 Group d1 Motor 1 vector control parameters 5 20 Group d2 Motor 1 V F Control Parameters 5 21 Group d3 to d5 Relevant parameters of motor 2 5 22 Group d6 Control Optimization Parameters 5 23 Group U0 Monitoring Parameters 5 24 Group AO System parameters 5 25 G
109. and keeps the present running frequency After the bus voltage declines the frequency inverter continues to decelerate bb 04 Overvoltage stall gain is used to adjust the overvoltage suppression capacity of the frequency inverter The larger the value is the greater the overvoltage suppression capacity will be In the prerequisite of no overvoltage occurrence set bb 04 to a small value For small inertia load the value should be small Otherwise the system dynamic response will be slow For large inertia load the value should be large Otherwise the suppression result will be poor and an overvoltage fault may occur If the overvoltage stall gain is set to 0 the overvoltage stall function is disabled The overvoltage stall protective voltage setting 100 corresponds to the base values in the following table Voltage Class Corresponding Base Value Single phase 220 V 290 V Three phase 220 V 290 V Three phase 380 V 530 V Three phase 480 V 620 V Three phase 690 V 880 V Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default bb 06 Over current stall 0 100 20 gain bb 07 Over currentstall 100 200 150 protective current Over current stall When the output current exceeds the over current stall protective current bb 07 during acceleration deceleration of the frequency inverter the frequency inverter stops acceleration deceleration and keeps the present running frequency After the ou
110. ans of the communication address 0x1000 Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 28 Encoder feedback _ 300 00Hz 300 00 Hz speed 3000 0Hz 3000 0 Hz It displays the motor running frequency measured by the encoder Ifb0 11 frequency command resolution is 1 the display range is 3000 0Hz 3000 0 Hz Ifb0 11 frequency command resolution is 2 the display range is 300 00Hz 300 00 Hz Code Parameter Name Display Range 0 00Hz 300 00 Hz 0 0Hz 3000 0 Hz It displays the setting of main frequency X Ifb0 11 frequency command resolution is 1 the display range is 3000 0Hz 3000 0 Hz Ifb0 11 frequency command resolution is 2 the display range is 300 00Hz 300 00 Hz U0 29 Main frequency X 118 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes Code Parameter Name Display Range 0 00Hz 300 00 Hz 0 0Hz 3000 0 Hz It displays the setting of auxiliary frequency Y Ifb0 11 frequency command resolution is 1 the display range is 3000 0Hz 3000 0 Hz Ifb0 11 frequency command resolution is 2 the display range is 300 00Hz 300 00 Hz U0 30 Auxiliary frequency Y Code Parameter Name Display Range Synchronous motor U0 32 0 0 359 9 rotor position It displays the rotor position of the synchronous motor Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 33 Motor temperature 0 C 200 C It displays the motor temperature obtained by means o
111. anual 117 Ifb0 11 frequency command resolution is set to 1 the display range is 3000 00 3000 00 Hz Ifb0 11 frequency command resolution is set to 2 the display range is 300 00Hz 300 00 Hz Code Parameter Name Display Range Remaining running U0 20 time 0 0min 6500 0 min It displays the remaining running time when the timing operation is enabled For details on timing operation refer to b2 28 b2 30 Code Parameter Name Display Range uo 21 All voltage before lo o0y 10 57 v correction uo 22 AP voltage before p 00y 10 57 V correction uo 23 AD voltage before 10 57y 10 57 V correction They display the AI sampling voltage actual value The actually used voltage is obtained after linear correction which will reduce the deviation between the sampled voltage and the actual input voltage For actual corrected voltage see U0 09 U0 10 and U0 11 Refer to group b8 for the correction mode Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 24 Linear speed 0 0min 65535m min It displays the linear speed of the DI6 high speed pulse sampling The unit is meter per minute meter min The linear speed is calculated according to the actual number of pulses sampled per minute and C3 07 Number of pulses per meter Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 27 Communication 1 00 00 100 00 setting value It displays the data written in by me
112. aster Multi slave system In this network every communication machine has a unique slave address One of them is as master usually PC host machine PLC and HMI etc actively sends out the communication to read or write the parameters of slave Other machines will be used as slave and response to the inquiry command from master At one time only one machine can send the data and other machines are in the receiving status The setup range of slave address is 0 to 247 Zero refers to broadcast communication address The address of slave must is exclusive in the network 3 Transmission mode There provide asynchronous series and half duplex transmission mode In the series asynchronous communication the data is sent out frame by frame in the form of message According to the Modbus RTU protocol when the free time of no transmission in communication data lines is more than the transmission time of 3 5byte it indicates that a new start of communication frame First sending of First replying of Second sending Second relaying Master slave A of master of slave M AYAYAY VV WW NAAM SE Y W W ONNA Wy y Vy y y ON MM M A AAW A OOOO AMAL lt gt lt gt lt ple B gt 3 5byte Data frame gt 3 5byte Data frame Transmission Transmission time time EM11 series inverter has built in the Modbus RTU communication protocol and is applicable to response the slave Inquiry command or doing the action according to the master s I
113. ay with braking resistor over hot detection shall be installed by terminal of the thermal protection relay to disconnect the contactor Input AC reactor or DC reactor Frequency inverter input side near the frequency inverter The inverter power supply capacity is more than 600kVA or 10 times of the inverter capacity If there is switch type reactive load compensation capacitor or load with silicon control at the same power node there will be high peak current flowing into input power circuit causing the damage of the rectifier components When the voltage unbalancedness of the three phase power supply of the inverter exceeds 3 the rectifier component will be damaged It is required that the input power factor of the inverter shall be higher than 90 When the above situations occurred install the AC reactor at the input side of the inverter or DC reactor to the DC reactor terminal Input noise filter The frequency inverter input side To reduce the noise input from the power to the inverter or output from the inverter to the power Thermal protection relay The output side of frequency inverter Although the inverter has motor overload protection function when one inverter drives two or more motors or multi pole motors to prevent the motor over temperature failure thermal protection relay shall be installed between the inverter and each motor Output filter The output side of frequency inverter
114. b9 07 Laie 0 0 C 100 0 C 0 C temperature It is used to display the temperature of heatsink Different inverter model has different temperature value for over temperature protection Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default bo og Accumulative 0 65535 h Oh power on time It is used to display the accumulative power on time of the frequency inverter since the delivery If the time reaches the set power on time b2 21 the terminal with the digital output function 24 becomes ON Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default bo o9 Accumulative 0 65535 h Oh running time It is used to display the accumulative running time of the frequency inverter After the accumulative running time reaches the value set in b2 21 the terminal with the digital output function 12 becomes ON Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Accumulative power b9 10 consumption 0 65535 kWh 0 kWh It is used to display the accumulative power consumption of the frequency inverter until now 5 11 Group bA Communication parameters Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default C icati bA 00 paca p5 0 Modbus protocol 0 type selection The EM11 now supports Modbus later will add the communication protocol such as PROFIBUS DP and CANopen For details see the description of EM11 communication protocol 79 5 Description of Function Codes EM11
115. cording to actual situation The greater the inertia the shorter deceleration time is needed and more frequently braking so the braking resistor needs the one with bigger power but smaller resistance value 2 Product Information EM11 User s Manual 2 9 1 Selection of braking resistance value When braking almost all the renewable energy of motor is consumed on the braking resistor According to the formula U U R Pb In the formula U The braking voltage when the system brake stably different system is different for the 330VAC system generally take 700V R Braking resistor Pb Power of braking 2 9 2 Selection power of braking resistor In theory the power of braking resistor is consistent with the braking power but it need to be taken into consideration that the braking resistor power will derate to 70 According to the formula 0 7 Pr Pb D In this formula Pr Power of resistor D Braking proportion the proportion that the regeneration process accounts for the whole process Elevator 20 30 Uncoiling and coiling machine 20 30 Centrifugal machine 50 60 Occasionally braking load 5 Other machine generally 10 Table 2 5 EM11 Inverter braking components selection table Recommend Recommend Braking Model power of resistance value of Remarks braking resistor braking resistor uni Single phase 220V
116. count value needs to be collected by DI terminal Set the corresponding DI terminal with function 28 Counter input in applications If the pulse frequency is high DI6 terminal must be used When the counting value reaches the set count value C3 08 the DO terminal set with function Set count value reached becomes ON Then the counter stops counting When the counting value reaches the designated counting value C3 09 the DO terminal set with function Designated count value reached becomes ON Then the counter continues to count until the set count value is reached 5 18 Group d0 Motor 1 Parameters Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default d0 00 Rated motor power 0 1kw 1000 0 kW Monel dependent Model d0 01 Rated motor voltage 1V 2000 V wes dependent 0 01A 655 35 A Frequency inverter power lt 55 kW Model d0 02 Rated motor current k 0 1A 6553 5 A Frequency inverter power gt 75 kW dependent d0 03 Rated motor 0 01 Hz maximum frequency 50 00Hz frequency 40 04 Rated motor Irpm 65535rpm Model rotational speed dependent Set the parameters according to the motor nameplate no matter whether V F control or vector control is adopted To achieve better V F or vector control performance motor auto tuning is required The motor auto tuning accuracy depends on the correct setting of motor nameplate parameters Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default d0 05 Stator
117. ction 1 The output pulse frequency of the FMP terminal ranges from 0 01 kHz to Maximum FMP output frequency b6 03 The value of b6 03 is between 0 01 kHz and 100 00 kHz The output range of AOI and AO2 is 0OV 10 V or OmA 20mA The relationship between pulse and analog output ranges and corresponding functions is listed in the following table Value uncon Range SUL eae ay is Roe Output Range 0 Running frequency OHz maximum frequency 1 Setting frequency OHz maximum frequency 2 Output current 0 2 times of rated motor current Output torque absolute 3 0 2 times of rated motor torque absolute value of torque value 4 Output power 0 2 times of rated power 5 Output voltage 0 1 2 times of rated frequency inverter DC bus voltage 6 Motor rotational speed 0 rotational speed corresponding to maximum frequency T Output current 0 0A 1000 0 A 8 Output voltage 0 0V 000 0 V Output torque actual 9 200 of rated motor torque 200 of rated motor torque value 0 Pulse input 0 01 kHz 100 00 kHz 1 AIl 0V 10 V 2 AI2 0V 10 V 3 AI3 0V 10 V 4 Length 0 maximum set length 5 Count value 0 maximum count value 6 Communication setting 0 32767 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b6 03 Maximum FMP output 0 01 kHz 50 00 kHz 50 00 kHz frequency If the FM terminal is used for pulse output this parameter is used to set the maximum frequency
118. d by switching the contactor on or off If the frequency inverter has to be operated by the contactor ensure that the time interval between switching is at least one hour Since frequently charge and discharge will shorten the service life of the capacitor inside of frequency inverter When a contactor is installed between the output side of the frequency inverter and the motor do not turn off the contactor when the frequency inverter is active Otherwise IGBT modules inside of frequency inverter may be damaged 1 2 8 When input voltage is over rated voltage range The frequency inverter must not be used over the allowable voltage range specified in this manual Otherwise the frequency inverter s components may be damaged If required use a corresponding voltage transformer device 1 2 9 Prohibition of three phase input changed into two phase input Do not change the three phase input of the frequency inverter to two phase input Otherwise a fault will be result or the frequency inverter will be damaged 1 2 10 Surge suppressor The frequency inverter has a built in voltage dependent resistor VDR for suppressing the surge voltage For frequently surge place please add extra surge voltage protection device at input side of frequency inverter Note Do not connect the surge suppressor at the output side of the AC 1 2 11 Altitude and de rating In places where the altitude is above 1000 m and the cooling effect reduces due to thin ai
119. deal yoltags of Al 0 500 4 000 V 2 000V calibration 1 b8 05 Sampling voltage of AI2 0 Sdn 000 2 000V calibration 1 b8 06 Ideal volage OFAI 6 000 9 999 V 8 000V calibration 2 b8 07 sampling voltage of AL 6 000 9 999 V 8 000V calibration 2 b8 08 eal Voltage OF ATS 0 500 4 000 V 2 000V calibration 1 b8 09 Sampling yotuiee ot AN 0 500 4 000 V 2 000V calibration 1 b8 10 Ideal voltage of AT3 6 000 9 999 V 8 000V calibration 2 b8 11 Sampling Voltage ot ATS 6 000 9 999 V 8 000V calibration 2 These parameters are used to correct the AI to eliminate the impact of AI zero offset and gain They have been corrected of delivery When you resume the factory values these parameters will be restored to the factory corrected values Generally you need not perform correction in the applications Measured voltage indicates the actual output voltage value measured by instruments such as the multimeter Displayed voltage indicates the voltage display value sampled by the frequency inverter For details refer to the voltage displayed before AI correction in group U0 During correction send two voltage values to each AI terminal and save the measured values and displayed values to the function codes b8 00 to b8 11 Then the frequency inverter will automatically perform AI zero offset and gain correction If the input voltage and the actual voltage sampled by the HC drive are inconsistent perform correction on site Take AIl as an exam
120. des two groups of any current reaching detection parameters including current detection value and detection amplitudes as shown in the following figure Any current reaching amplitude Any current reaching gt Any current reaching l i detection signal _ON _ON DO or relay OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Diagram 5 19 Any current reaching detection Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b4 39 Module temperature threshold 25 100 C 75 C When the heatsink temperature of the frequency inverter reaches the value of this parameter the corresponding DO becomes ON indicating that the IGBT module temperature reaches the threshold 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual 67 5 6 Group b5 Pulse Analog input terminals Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b5 00 Pulse minimum input HDI 0 00 kHz b5 02 0 00 kHz Corresponding setting of pulse b5 01 100 00 100 0 0 00 minimum input b5 02 Pulse maximum input b5 00 50 00 kHz 50 00 kHz Corresponding setting of pulse b5 03 100 00 100 0 100 0 maximum input b5 04 Pulse filter time 0 00s 10 00s 10 00s Can only be input by DI6 The method of setting this function is similar to that of setting AI1 function Corresponding setting of pulse maximum input B5 03 Corresponding setting of pulse minimum input i B5 01 i gt Pulse minimum input P
121. e 0 1 same as DI1 Ten thousand s digit DIS valid mode 0 1 same as DI1 Appendix II EM11 User s Manual 149 Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property b3 26 DI valid selection 2 Unit s digit DI6 valid mode 0 1 same as DI1 Ten s digit DI7 valid mode 0 1 same as DI1 Hundred s digit DI8 state 0 1 same as DI1 Thousand s digit DI9 valid mode 0 1 same as DI1 Ten thousand s digit DI10 valid mode 0 1 same as DI1 00000 b3 27 DI valid selection 3 Unit s digit DI11 valid mode 0 1 same as DI1 Ten s digit DI12 valid mode 0 1 same as DI1 00 Group b4 Switch Signal output Terminals b4 00 FM terminal output mode 0 Pulse output FMP 1 Switch signal output FMR b4 01 FMR function open collector output terminal b4 02 Relay 1 function TA TB TC b4 03 Reserved b4 04 DO function selection open collector output terminal b4 05 DO2 function extend 0 No output 1 Ready signal 2 Frequency inverter running 3 Fault output free stop fault 4 Fault output free stop fault but do not output when lower voltage 5 Swing frequency limit 6 Torque limit 7 Frequency upper limit reached 8 Frequency lower limit reached relevant to running 9 Frequency lower limit reached having output at stop 0 Reverse running 1 Zero speed running no outpu
122. e Power input ig 1 Eliminate external faults Power input Abnormal 2 Ask for technical support P Errl2 2 The drive board is faulty ppg phase loss 3 Ask for technical support 3 The lightningproof board is faulty A Ask for technical support 4 The main control board is faulty e pport 1 The cable connecting the frequency inverter and the motor is faulty 1 Eliminate external faults 2 The frequency inverter s three phase 2 Check whether the motor three Power output j EE ta Errl3 outputs are unbalanced when the motor is phase winding is normal phase loss running 3 Ask for technical support 3 The drive board is faulty 4 Ask for technical support 4 The IGBT module is faulty 1 nS ambient temperature ss too high 1 Lower the ambient temperature 2 The air filter is blocked i a 3 The fan is damaged 2 Clean the air filter IGBT Module 3 Replace the damaged fan Errl4 4 The thermally sensitive resistor of the overheat 4 Replace the damaged thermally IGBT module is damaged sensitive resistor 5 The inverter IGBT module is re 5 Replace the inverter module damaged External 1 External fault signal is input via DI p e ae 1 Reset the operation equipment Errl5 2 External fault signal is input via virtual R 2 Reset the operation fault T O 1 The host computer is in abnormal 1 Check ther cabling OF Host computer state ioa eg A 2 Check the communication ee 2 The commu
123. e count value length value linear speed PID setting PID feedback etc You can set whether these parameters are displayed by setting b9 02 and b9 03 When the frequency inverter is repowered on again after power failure the parameters are recorded as before power failure and displaying 4 6 Password Setting The frequency inverter provides the user password protection function When A0 00 is set to a non zero value the value is the user password The password takes effect after you exit the function code editing state When you press PRG key will be displayed and you must enter the correct user password to enter the menu To cancel the password protection function enter with password and set A0 00 to 0 4 7 Motor parameter auto tuning Select vector control running mode before frequency inverter start to operate you must accurately write in the nameplate parameter of motor by keypad EM11 frequency inverter will match standard motor parameter according to the nameplate the vector control mode strongly depended on motor s parameters if you want to get good control performance then you must let inverter to obtain the exact parameters of controlled motor The process of motor auto tuning is as follows Firstly select command source b0 03 as keypad command channel Then write in the actual motor parameters as the following parameters according to the nameplate of present motor 36 EM11 User s Manual
124. e Default b4 24 aes ag vali 0 00Hz maximum frequency 50 00 Hz Frequency detection hysteresis b4 25 0 0 100 0 FDT2 level 5 09 FDT hysteresis 2 m a evel The frequency detection function is the same as FDT1 function For details refer to the descriptions of b4 22 and b4 23 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Detecti litude of b4 26 E sae 0 00 100 maximum frequency 3 0 frequency reached If the frequency inverter running frequency is within the certain range of the set frequency the corresponding DO terminal becomes ON This parameter is used to set the range within which the output frequency is detected to reach the set frequency The value of this parameter is a percentage relative to the maximum frequency The detection range of frequency reached is shown in the following figure 64 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes Output frequency A Hz Setting frequency Detection range Frequency reached A Detection signal gt Time t ON ON gt Time t Diagram 5 15 Detection range of frequency reached Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Any fi hi b4 27 ne ene hated 0 00 Hz maximum frequency 50 00 Hz detection value 1 Any fi hi b4 28 ny lrequency reacamng 0 0 100 0 maximum frequency 3 0 detection amplitude 1 b4 29 Any frequency reaching 0 00 Hz maximum frequenc
125. e before lp ooy 10 57 V is e correction 78 EM11 User s Manual Appendix II Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property uo 22 Al voltage before 9 00y 10 57 V 5 correction uo 23 AB voltage before 10 57y 10 57V correction U0 24 Linear speed 0 0min 65535m min U0 25 Present power on time U0 26 Present running time U0 27 Communication setting 100 00 100 00 _ value Ok Prcodeitedhk d 3000 0Hz 3000 0 Hz U0 28 Encoder feedback speed 300 00Hz 300 00 Hz 7 0 29 Mint x 0 00Hz 300 00 Hz go ain Irequency amp f0 0Hz 3000 0 Hz 7 U0 30 Auxiliary fr n 0 00Hz 300 00 Hz Mx tary Beduency 0 0Hz 3000 0 Hz U0 31 Viewing any register 0 C 200 C i A address value Uo 32 Synchronous motor 0 ge 3599o z rotor position U0 33 Motor temperature _ 0 C 200 C U0 34 Target torque 200 0 200 0 e U0 35 Resolver position _ 0 4095 U0 36 Power factor angle U0 37 ABZ position 0 65535 U0 38 Target volage ee 0 V rated motor voltage separation U0 39 Oueus voltage SEVE 0 V rated motor voltage e separation 0 40 DI input state visual i 7 display U0 41 DO output state visual 2 p n display U0 42 DI funcion state visual l P display 1 U0 43 DO function state visual e display U0 44 Fault information U0 45 Phase Z signal counting U0 46 Present setting 100
126. e frequency inverter s cover after power on to prevent from electric shock Do not touch the frequency inverter with wet hand and its peripheral circuit to prevent from electric shock Do not touch the terminals of the frequency inverter including the control terminals Failure to comply may result in electric shock Do not touch the U V W terminal or motor connecting terminals when frequency inverter automatically does safety testing for the external high voltage electrical circuit Failure to comply may result in electric shock A Warning Note the danger during the rotary running of motor when check the parameters Failure to comply will result in accidents Do not change the factory default settings of the frequency inverter Failure to comply will result in damage to the frequency inverter EM11 User s Manual 1 Safety Information and Precautions 1 1 6 During operation A Danger Do not go close to the equipment when selected the restart function Failure to comply may result in personal injury Do not touch the fan or the discharging resistor to check the temperature Failure to comply will result in personal injury Signal detection must be performed only by qualified personal during operation A Warning Avoid objects falling into the frequency inverter when it is running Failure to comply will result in damage to frequency inverter Do not start stop the frequency inverter by turn
127. e shortest time During the stop process the current 44 Emergency stop remains at the set current upper limit This function is used to satisfy the requirement of stopping the frequency inverter in emergency state In operation keypad mode this terminal can be used to stop the 45 External STOP terminal 1 frequency inverter equivalent to the function of the STOP key on the operation keypad In any control mode operation panel terminal or 46 External STOP terminal 2 communication it can be used to make the frequency inverter decelerate to stop In this case the deceleration time is deceleration time 4 When this terminal becomes ON the frequency inverter 47 Deceleration DC braking decelerates to the initial frequency of DC braking and then switches over to DC braking state 56 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual Value Function Description This parameter is used to set the mode in which the frequency inverter is controlled by external terminals Pay eee ee eee After this terminal becomes ON the frequency inverter directly The following uses DU DI2 and DI3 among DI to DI12 as an examp
128. ed as frequency setting source the corresponding value 100 of voltage current input corresponds to the value of d1 27 4 Pulse setting DI6 The target torque is set by DI6 high speed pulse The pulse setting signal specification is 9V 30 V voltage range and 0 kHz 100 kHz frequency range The pulse can only be input via DI6 The relationship which is a two point line between DI6 input pulse frequency and the corresponding value is set in b5 00 b5 03 The corresponding value 100 0 of pulse input corresponds to the percentage of d1 27 5 Communication setting The target torque is set by means of communication Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Forward maximum d1 30 frequency in torque 0 00 Hz maximum frequency b0 13 50 00 Hz control Reverse maximum dl 31 frequency in torque 0 00 Hz maximum frequency b0 13 50 00 Hz control The two parameters are used to set the maximum frequency in forward or reverse rotation in torque control mode In torque control if the load torque is smaller than the motor output torque the motor s rotational speed will rise continuously To avoid runaway of the mechanical system the motor maximum rotating speed must be limited in torque control You can implement continuous change of the maximum frequency in torque control dynamically by controlling the frequency upper limit Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default di 32 Asceleration time in
129. eleration time and stops when the frequency decreases to zero 1 Free stop After the stop command is enabled the frequency inverter immediately stops the output The motor will free stop based on the mechanical inertia Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b1 08 DC braking initial frequency 0 00 Hz maximum frequency 0 00 Hz of stopping b1 09 DC braking waiting time of 0 0s 100 0s 0 0s stopping b1 10 DC braking current of 0 100 0 stopping bl 11 DC braking time of stopping 0 0s 100 0s 0 0s b1 08 Initial frequency of stop DC braking During the process of decelerating to stop the frequency inverter starts DC braking when the running frequency is lower than the value set in b1 08 b1 09 Waiting time of stop DC braking When the running frequency decreases to the initial frequency of stop DC braking the frequency inverter stops output for a certain period and then starts DC braking This prevents faults such as over current caused due to DC braking at high speed b1 10 Stop DC braking current This parameter specifies the output current at DC braking and is a percentage relative to the motor rated current The larger the value is the stronger the DC braking effects but the more heat the motor and frequency inverter emit bl 11 Stop DC braking time This parameter specifies the holding time of DC braking If it is set to 0 DC braking is cancelled The stop DC braking process
130. en sudden change of the frequency inverter output frequency but slowing the response of the process closed loop system Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Detection value of C0 25 0 0 Not judging feedback loss 0 1 100 0 0 09 PID feedback loss 7 Not judging feedback loss 9 1 C0 26 Detection time of PID 0 0s 20 0s 0 0s feedback loss These parameters are used to judge whether PID feedback is lost If the PID feedback is smaller than the value of C0 25 and the lasting time exceeds the value of C0 26 the frequency inverter reports Err31 and acts according to the selected fault protection action Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 No PID operation at stop C0 27 PID operation at stop 0 1 PID operation at stop It is used to select whether to continue PID operation in the state of stopping Generally to set the PID operation stops when the frequency inverter stops 5 15 Group C1 Multi function The Multi function of EM11 has many functions Besides multi speed it can be used as the setting source of the V F separated voltage source and setting source of process PID In addition the Multi function is relative value The simple PLC function is different from the EM11 user programmable function Simple PLC can only complete simple combination of Multi function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default C1 00 Multi functio
131. ency inverter producing in factory 14 EM11 User s Manual 2 Product Information 2 7 3 Wearing parts replacement The wearing parts of frequency inverter include the cooling fan and filting electrolytic capacitor its service life is closely related to the using environment and maintenance status The general service life is Part Name Service Life Fan 3 to 4 Years Electrolytic capacitor 5 to 6 Years The user can confirm the replace time according to the running time 1 Possible reasons for the damage of cooling fan bearing wear and blade aging Distinguish standard Any cracks in the fan blade any abnormal vibration sound during the starting of frequency inverter 2 Possible reasons for the damage of filting electrolytic capacitor poor quality of the input power supply the environment temperature is higher the load change frequently and the electrolyte aging Distinguish standard Any leakage of its liquid if the safety valve is protruding electrostatic capacitance and insulation resistance measurement 2 7 4 Storage of the frequency inverter After buying the frequency inverter users shall pay attention to the temporary and long term storage as following 1 Store the frequency inverter in the original packaging 2 Long term storage can lead to the degradation of electrolytic capacitors and must ensure to power on for once within 2 years And the power on time is at least 5 hours The inpu
132. ency x 0 025 Control mode Sensor less vector control SVC Closed loop vector control VC PG card Voltage Frequency V F control Startup torque G type 0 5 Hz 150 SVC 0 Hz 180 VC P type 0 5 Hz 100 Speed range 1 100 SVC Speed range Speed stability accuracy 0 5 SVC 0 02 VC Torque control accuracy 5 VC Overload capacity G type 60s for 150 of the rated current 3s for 180 of the rated current P type 60s for 120 of the rated current 3s for 150 of the rated current Torque boost Auto boost Manual boost 0 1 30 0 V F curve Straight line V F curve Multi point V F curve N power V F curve 1 2 power 1 4 power 1 6 power 1 8 power square V F separation Two types complete separation half separation Acceleration deceleration curve Straight line ramp S curve ramp Four groups of acceleration deceleration time with the range of 0 0s 65000s DC braking DC braking frequency 0 00 Hz maximum frequency Braking time 0 0s 36 0s Braking trigger current value 0 0 100 0 Standard functions JOG control JOG frequency range 0 00Hz 50 00 Hz JOG acceleration deceleration time 0 00s 6500 0s Built in simple PLC multiple speeds It realizes up to 16 speeds via the simple PLC function or combination of DI terminal states Built in PID It realizes closed loop control system easily Au
133. enient for view and modification Group A1 provides a maximum of 32 user defined parameters If A1 00 is displayed it indicates that group A1 is null After you enter user defined function code mode the displayed parameters are defined by A1 00 A1 31 and the sequence is consistent with that in group A1 124 EM11 User s Manual 6 EMC Electromagnetic compatibility 6 EMC Electromagnetic compatibility 6 1 Definition Electromagnetic compatibility is the ability of the electric equipment to run in the electromagnetic interference environment and implement its function stably without interferences on the electromagnetic environment 6 2 EMC Standard Description In accordance with the requirements of the national standard GB T12668 3 the inverter needs to comply with electromagnetic interference and anti electromagnetic interference requirements The existing products of our company apply the latest international standard IEC EN61800 3 2004 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems part 3 EMC requirements and specific test methods which is equivalent to the national standard GB T12668 3 IEC EN61800 3 assesses the inverter in terms of electromagnetic interference and anti electronic interference Electromagnetic interference mainly tests the radiation interference conduction interference and harmonics interference on the inverter required for the inverter for civil use Anti electromagnetic interference mainly t
134. ential UVW 18 interface ABZ and resolver 3 10 4 Wiring of Analog Input Terminals When the voltage signal is used as analog input it is vulnerable from outside interference Please use shielding cable and ensure that the shielding cable reliably connect to the grounding The cable should be as short as possible and keep away from power lines In serious interference occasions you might consider to add a filter capacitor or ferrite core in signal cable Resistance gt SKOhm lt Distance lt 20m Potentiometer 10V it D i i Z GND Diagram 3 13 Wiring of analog input terminals 3 Installation of Frequency Inverter EM11 User s Manual 29 3 10 5 Wiring of Multi functional Input Terminals DI wiring mode 2 The external power supply is used when DI is set as NPN mode DI wiring mode l Factory default wiring mode The external power supply is not use when DI is set as NPN mode O 24V Q 24V Lo ODI DR DI3 EM11 EMI11 O DI4 Loo ODIS DIS ae DI6 HDI ea P OAD Single end of shielded Single end of shielded cable grounding 5 COM cable grounding O COM J DI wiring mode 4 The external power supply is used when DI is set as NPN mode DI wiring mode 3 The external power supply is not used when DI is set as NPN mode Q 24V DI bpp DI3 EMI DI4 DI5 0 DI6 HDI DI6 HDI Lo o Single end of sh
135. equency 4 Hz Setting frequency BQ 13 fe Blis i i i gt p i f i Time t Acceleration Deceleration t time 1 i i time 1 i Acceleration i Deceleration time 2 time 2 Diagram 5 8 Acceleration deceleration time switchover During acceleration if the running frequency is smaller than the value of b2 13 acceleration time 1 is selected If the running frequency is larger than the value of b2 13 acceleration time 2 is selected During deceleration if the running frequency is larger than the value of b2 14 deceleration time 1 is selected If the running frequency is smaller than the value of b2 14 deceleration time 2 is selected Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b2 15 R 0 Enabled everse running 1 Disabled 0 It is used to set whether the frequency inverter allows reverse rotation In the applications where reverse rotation is prohibited set this parameter to 1 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b2 16 Forward Reverse rotation 0 0 3000 0s 0 0s dead zone time It is used to set the time when the output is 0 Hz at transition of the frequency inverter forward rotation and reverse rotation as shown in the following figure 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual 51 A Output frequency Hz Forward rotation FWD gt Time t i 3 N Dead zone time Reverse rotation REV Diagram 5 9 _ Forward Reverse ro
136. equency 50 00 Hz o detection value 1 Any frequency reaching g b4 28 detection amplitude 1 0 0 100 0 maximum frequency 3 0 0 Any fi hi b4 29 i R reac UNS 19 00 Hz maximum frequency 50 00 Hz a detection value 2 Any fi hi p4 30 Y Tmequency Teac WNS 9 0 100 0 maximum frequency 3 0 o detection amplitude 2 Zi t detecti bagi SOTO ENEA ACRON 0 0 100 0 rated motor current 5 0 0 Zi t detecti p4 32 ro em AetechoR 0 005 600 00s 0 10s D delay time O t t b4 33 ver current output 9 0 300 0 rated motor current 200 0 o0 threshold O t f b4 34 OVOr current output 0 009 600 00s 0 10s 0 detection delay time b4 35 Any current reaching 0 0 100 0 rated motor current 100 0 0 p4 36 Amplitude of any current 00 100 0 rated motor current 3 0 0 reaching 1 b4 37 Any current reaching 2 0 0 100 0 rated motor current 100 0 0 Amplitude of b4 38 mpamee ot DY 0 0 100 0 rated motor current 3 0 0 current reaching 2 b4 39 Module temperature 25 100 C 75 C 0 threshold Group b5 Pulse Analog input terminals Pulse minimum b5 00 input HDI6 0 00 kHz b5 02 0 00 kHz 0 C di tti a b5 01 lt OTesponding SemS 100 00 100 0 0 00 0 of pulse minimum input b5 02 Pulse maximum input b5 00 50 00 kHz 50 00 kHz 0 C di tti 5 03 Omesponeans SemS 100 00 100 0 100 0 0 of pulse maximum input b5 04 Pulse filter time 0 00s 10 00s 10 00s 0 AI input voltage b5 05 PUN Vo tage Ower l0 00 V b5 06 3
137. equency or main frequency X If relative to main frequency X the setting range of the auxiliary frequency Y varies according to the main frequency X Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit Frequency source selection 0 Main frequency source X 1 X and Y calculation calculation result determined by ten s digit 2 Switchover between X and Y 3 Switchover between X and X and Y j calculation ne Frequency scutes selection 4 Switchover between Y and X and Y 9 calculation Ten s digit X and Y calculation relationship 0 X Y 1 X Y 2 Maximum of them 3 Minimum of them It is used to select the frequency setting channel Frequency setting can be realized by the main frequency source X and auxiliary frequency source Y operation Frequency source Frequency source X and Y Setting of operation Target running selection operation selection conditions frequency BO 07 a E unit s digit Main frequency X 0 sowceX X Setting frequency frgSet N TgSe BO 07 ten s digit Auxilliary frequency BO 05 ji source Y BO 06 a L Ir ea Amplitude limit XY ie rm MAX requency switchover MIN B3 00 to B3 11 15 DIE DIL2 Diagram 5 1 Target frequency setting If the frequency source involves X and Y operation you can set
138. er power off Main frequency source X 2 All ee selection 3 AI2 4 AI3 5 Pulse setting DI6 6 Multi function 7 Built in PLC 8 PID 9 Communication setting It is used to select the setting channel of the main frequency You can set the main frequency in the following 10 channels 0 Digital setting Preset frequency b0 12 UP DOWN modifiable not record at power failure The initial value of the set frequency is the value of b0 12 Preset frequency You can change the set frequency by pressing Aand on the operation panel or using the UP DOWN function of input terminals When the Frequency inverter is powered on again after power failure the set frequency reverts to the value of b0 12 1 Digital setting Preset frequency b0 12 UP DOWN modifiable record at power failure The initial value of the set frequency is the value of b0 12 Preset frequency You can change the set frequency by pressing keys A and Von the operation panel or using the UP DOWN functions of input terminals When the frequency inverter is powered on again after power failure the setting frequency is the value memorized at the moment of the last power failure Note that b0 10 record digital setting frequency of power failure determines whether the set frequency is memorized or cleared when the frequency inverter stops It is related to stopping rather than power failure 2 ATI 3 AI2 4 AI3 The frequency is set by analog input The EM11 contr
139. eration deceleratio n time of simple PLC 0 3 167 Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property Segment 14 C2 32 Aee le Io s n 6553 5s h 0 0s h 0 Acceleration deceleratio C2 33 n time of simple PLC 0 3 0 o Segment 15 Time unit of simple 0 s second oo PLC running 1 h hour 0 I Group C3 Swing Frequency Fixed Length and Count Swing frequency setting 0 Relative to the central frequency C3 00 i 0 0 mode 1 Relative to the maximum frequency c3 01 Swing frequency Ip 90 100 0 0 0 0 amplitude Textile jump frequency C3 02 amplitude of Swing 0 0 50 0 0 0 0 running C3 03 Swing frequency cycle 0 1s 3000 0s 10 0s a c3 o4 Tangular wave rising p 10100 0 50 0 o time coefficient C3 05 Set length 0m 65535 m 1000 m a C3 06 Actual length 0m 65535 m 0m a c3 07 Number of pulses per a 1 6553 5 100 0 0 meter C3 08 Set count value 1 65535 1000 0 C3 09 Designated count value 1 65535 1000 0 Group d0 Motor 1 Parameters d0 00 Rated motor power 0 1kw 1000 0 kW mee D dependent d0 01 Rated motor voltage 1V 2000 V RO D dependent 0 01A 655 35 A Frequency inverter power lt 55 kW Model ee Rated motot current 0 Ta 53 5 A Frequency inverter power dependent I gt 75 kW d0 03 Rated motor frequency 0 01 Hz maximum frequency 50 00Hz a Rated motor rotational Model 0 04 DEd I
140. eshooting Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 No operation 1 Restore default settings except motor parameters and accumulation record A0 09 Restore default 2 Restore default settings for all parameters 0 settings 3 Reserve 4 Clear records Ohter Reserve 121 22 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes 0 No operation 1 Restore default settings except motor parameters If A0 09 is set to 1 most function codes are restored to the default settings except motor parameters frequency command resolution b0 11 fault records accumulative running time b9 09 accumulative power on time b9 08 and accumulative power consumption b9 10 2 Restore default settings for all parameters including motor parameters 3 Restore user backup parameters If A0 09 is set to 3 the previous backup user parameters are restored backup by setting A0 09 999 4 Clear records If A0 09 is set to 4 the fault records accumulative power on time b9 08 accumulative running time b9 09 and accumulative power consumption b9 10 are cleared 999 Back up present user parameters If A0 09 is set to 999 the present parameter settings are backed up helping you to restore the setting if incorrect parameter setting is performed 5 25 Group A1 User Defined Function Codes Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default defi
141. ests the conduction interference rejection radiation interference rejection surge interference rejection fast and mutable pulse group interference rejection ESD interference rejection and power low frequency end interference rejection specific test items including 1 Interference rejection tests of input voltage sag interrupt and change 2 Phase conversion interference rejection test 3 Harmonic input interference rejection test 4 Input frequency change test 5 Input voltage unbalance test 6 input voltage fluctuation test The tests shall be conducted strictly in accordance with the above requirements of IEC EN61800 3 and the products of our company are installed and used according to Section 7 3 and have good electromagnetic compatibility in general industry environment 6 3 EMC Guide 6 3 1 Harmonic Effect Higher harmonics of power supply may damage the inverter Thus at some places where mains quality is rather poor it is recommended to install AC input reactor 6 3 2 Electromagnetic Interference and Installation Precautions There are two kinds of electromagnetic interferences one is interference of electromagnetic noise in the surrounding environment on the inverter and the other is interference of inverter on the surrounding equipment Installation precautions 1 The earth wires of the frequency inverter and other electric products shall be well grounded 2 The power input and output power cables of the inverter a
142. excited time see parameters of b1 05 and b1 06 If the pre excited time is 0 the frequency inverter cancels pre excitation and starts to run from startup 46 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes frequency If the pre excited time is not 0 the frequency inverter pre excites firstly before startup improving the dynamic response of the motor Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 From frequency at stop b1 01 Rotational speed tracking 1 From zero speed 0 2 From maximum frequency To complete the rotational speed tracking process within the shortest time select the proper mode in which the frequency inverter tracks the motor rotational speed 0 From frequency at stop It is the commonly selected mode 1 From zero frequency It is applicable to restart after a long time of power failure 2 From the maximum frequency It is applicable to the power generating load mode Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Rotational speed tracking b1 02 1 100 20 speed In the rotational speed tracking restart mode select the rotational speed tracking speed The larger the value is the faster the tracking is However too large value may cause unreliable tracking Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b1 03 Startup frequency 0 00 10 00 Hz 0 00 Hz Startup frequency holding b1 04 0 0s 100 0s 0 0s time To ensure the m
143. f AI3 sampling For the motor temperature detection details see bb 25 Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 34 Target torque 200 0 200 0 It displays the present torque upper limit value Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 35 Resolver position 0 4095 It displays the current resolver position Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 36 Power factor angle It displays the present power factor angle Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 37 ABZ position 0 65535 It displays the phase A and B pulse counting of the present ABZ or UVW encoder This value is four times the number of pulses that the encoder runs For example if the display is 4000 the actual number of pulses that the encoder runs is 4000 4 1000 The value increase when the encoder rotates in forward direction and decreases when the encoder rotates in reverse direction After increasing to 65535 the value starts to increase from 0 again After decreasing to 0 the value starts to decrease from 65535 again You can check whether the installation of the encoder is normal by viewing U0 37 Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 38 Target voltage EVE 0 V rated motor voltage separation U0 39 Ouiput voltige SEVE 0 V rated motor voltage separation They display the target output voltage and present actual output voltage in the V F separation state For V F separation more details
144. faulty j x z parameters 1 Check and reset the 1 The parameters are set incorrectly parameters in group F4 2 The external signal is incorrect 2 Re connect the external signal The DI terminals are 7 i 3 The jumper bar across OP and 24 V cables disabled becomes loose 3 Re confirm the jumper bar 4 The control board is faulty across OP and 24 V 4 Ask for technical support 1 The encoder is faulty The motor speed is 2 The encoder cable is connected 1 Replace te encoder and gt f ensure the cabling is proper 8 always low in VC incorrectly or in poor contact 2 Replace the PG card mode 3 The PG card is faulty 3 Ask for technical rt 4 The drive board is faulty ASS TOE et ca SUPPO The frequenc 1 Re set motor parameters or q Y _ 1 The motor parameters are set improperly re perform the motor auto inverter reports over y i i A 2 The acceleration deceleration time is tuning 9 current and i overvoltaga improper 2 Set proper acceleration frequenti 3 The load fluctuates deceleration time q y 3 Ask for technical support 1 Check whether the contactor cable is loose Errl7 is reported of 2 Check whether the contactor 10 S reported The soft startup contactor is not sucked up is faulty PONERET On TANNNE 3 Check whether 24 V power supply of the contactor is faulty 4 Ask for technical support 11 BEBES is displayed Related component on the control board is Replace the cont
145. g be zero the terminal becomes ON 3 Fault output free stop ig the frequency inverter stops due to a fault the terminal becomes Fault output free stop 4 fault no output at under voltage If the set frequency exceeds the frequency upper limit or lower limit 5 Swing frequency limited jand the output frequency of the frequency inverter reaches the upper limit or lower limit the terminal becomes ON In speed control mode if the output torque reaches the torque limit 6 Torque limited the frequency inverter enters the stall protection state and meanwhile the terminal becomes ON 7 Frequency upper limit If the running frequency reaches the upper limit the terminal becomes reached ON 8 Frequency lower limit If the running frequency reaches the lower limit the terminal becomes reached no output at ON In the stop state the terminal becomes OFF Frequency lower limit 5 ECIN PROE 9 reached having output at If the running frequency reaches the lower limit the terminal becomes stop ON In the stop state the signal is still ON 10 Reverse running If the frequency inverter is in the reverse running state the terminal becomes ON 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual Value Function Description Zero speed running no If the frequency inverter runs with the output frequency of 0 the 1 pice at a
146. ge Default Property 38 Normally open NO input of external 53 08 DI9 function fault 0 T selection extend 39 Normally closed NC input of external fault 40 User defined fault 1 b3 09 DILO function 41 User defined fault 2 0 m selection extend 42 Running pause z 43 Free stop DI11 function 44 Emergency stop l b3 10 selection extend 45 External STOP terminal 1 0 m extend 46 External STOP terminal 2 7 47 Deceleration DC braking b3 11 DI12 function 48 Immediate DC braking 0 selection extend 49 Clear the current running time 5 b3 12 DI filter time 0 000s 1 000s 0 010s 0 0 Two line mode 1 b3 13 Terminal command 1 Two line mode 2 0 2 mode 2 Three line mode 1 E 3 Three line mode 2 b3 14 G DOWN o 001Hz s 65 535 Hz s 0 100Hz s O b3 15 DI1 ON delay time _ 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s 0 b3 16 DI1 OFF delay time _ 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s 0 b3 17 DI2 ON delay time __ 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s 0 b3 18 DI2 OFF delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s 0 b3 19 DI3 ON delay time _ 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s 0 b3 20 DI3 OFF delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s 0 b3 21 DI4 ON delay time _ 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s 0 b3 22 DI4 OFF delay time _ 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s 0 b3 23 DI5 ON delay time _ 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s 0 b3 24 DIS OFF delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s 0 Unit s digit DI1 valid mode 0 Low level valid 1 High level valid Ten s digit DI2 valid mode 0 1 same as DI1 b3 25 DI valid selection 1 Hundred s digit DI3 valid mode 00000 0 0 1 same as DI1 Thousand s digit DI4 valid mod
147. ge Default _ Property for V F separation er 0 0s 1000 0s d2 14 volage fise a DEVIE Note It indicates the time for the voltage 0 0s o AANA rising from 0 V rated motor voltage Group d3 Motor 2 Parameters d3 00 Rated motor power 0 1kw 1000 0 kW Ha D dependent d3 01 Rated motor voltage 1V 2000 V fet D dependent 0 01A 655 35 A Frequency inverter power lt 55 kW Model eu Bales epee 0 1A 6553 5 A Frequency inverter power dependent I gt 75 kW d3 03 Rated motor frequency 0 01 Hz maximum frequency 50 00Hz 0 Rated motor rotational Model d3 04 spezd Irpm 65535rpm Jebendeni o 0 001Q 65 535 Q Frequency inverter 43 05 Stator resistance powers 55 kW Model 0 asynchronous motor 0 0001Q 6 5535 Q Frequency inverter dependent power gt 75 kW 0 001Q 65 535 Q Frequency inverter 43 06 Rotor resistance powers 55 kW Model T asynchronous motor 0 0001Q 6 5535 Q Frequency inverter dependent power gt 75 kW Teikage inductive 0 01mH 655 35 mH Frequency inverter d3 07 reactance asynchronous powers o3 KW Mogel o hoto 0 001mH 65 535 mH Frequency inverter dependent power gt 75 kW Mutual inductive 0 1mH 6553 5 mH Frequency inverter d3 08 reactance asynchronous powert S SSKW Model o ODD 0 01mH 655 35 mH Frequency inverter dependent power gt 75 kW 0 01 A d3 02 Frequency inverter power lt 43 09 No load current 55 kW Model T asynchronous motor 0 1 A d3 02 Frequency inverter power dependent gt 75 kW 0 001Q 65 5
148. gonal When analog voltage and current signals are adopted for remote frequency setting twinning shielding cable shall be used The shielding layer shall be connected to the grounding terminal PE of the inverter and the signal cable shall be no longer than 50m The wires of the control circuit terminals RA RB RC and other control circuit terminals shall be separately routed 25 26 EM11 User s Manual 3 Installation of Frequency Inverter It is forbidden to short circuit the shielding layer and other signal cables and the equipment When the inverter is connected to the inductive load equipment e g electromagnetic contactor relay and solenoid valve surge suppressor must be installed on the load equipment coil as showed in Diagram 3 10 c c o i varistor ma ti i ive 2 Inductive DC 24V Inductive AC 220V Inductive AC 220V load load load v O O O Diagram 3 10 Application example of inductive load surge suppressor 3 10 Control Circuit and Main Circuit Terminals Description 3 10 1 Control Circuit and Main Circuit Wiring Braking resistor P PB oS OR UO Three phase AC ul ey power supply 9S y Lo D OT EMI wo J3 3B hee PEC a amp ONO ON OFF i o aa Default 4 AS Multi function input
149. gulator on the deviation change The longer the differential time is the larger the regulating intensity is Differential time is the time within which the feedback value change reaches 100 0 and then the adjustment amplitude reaches the maximum frequency Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Proportional gain C0 09 KP2 0 00 10 00 20 0 C0 10 Integral time TI2 _ 0 01s 10 00s 2 00s C0 11 Differential time TD2 0 00s 10 00s 0 000s PID parameter 0 No switchover Gola switchover condition 1 Syritehover Gna i 2 Automatic switchover based on deviation PID parameter C0 13 switchover deviation 0 0 C0 14 20 0 92 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default PID parameter C0 14 switchover deviation C0 13 100 0 80 0 2 In some applications PID parameters switchover is required when one group of PID parameters cannot satisfy the requirement of the whole running process These parameters are used for switchover between two groups of PID parameters Regulator parameters C0 09 C0 11 are set in the same way as C0 06 C0 08 The switchover can be implemented either via a DI terminal or automatically implemented based on the deviation If you select switchover via a DI terminal the DI must be set with function 43 PID parameter switc
150. h mode corresponds to the rated motor voltage If the corresponding value is negative its absolute value is used Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 0s 1000 0s Note It indicates the time for the voltage rising from 0 V 0 0s 42 14 Voltage rise nee of V F separation rated motor voltage d2 14 indicates the time required for the output voltage to rise from 0 V to the rated motor voltage shown 113 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual as tl in the following figure Output voltageA Rated motor voltage Output target voltage Actual voltage rising time Actual Voltage declining time REA tl o l 2 Setting voltage rising time Setting voltage declining time Diagram 5 33 Voltage of V F separation 5 21 Group d3 to d5 Relevant parameters of motor 2 EM11 series support the switchover of two groups of motor parameters and the two motors can separately set the motor nameplate parameters motor auto tuning parameters V F control or vector control mode the related parameters of encoder and the related performance parameters of V F control or vector control mode For the setting of motor 2 please refer to the relevant description of motor1 parameters 5 22 Group d6 Control Optimization Parameters Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Model dependent d6 00 Carrier frequency 0 5kHz 15 0 kHz It is used to adjust the carrier f
151. he functions of these parameters are to use AI as DI When AI is used as DI the AI state is high level if the AI input voltage is 7 V or higher and is low level if the AI input voltage is 3 V or lower If the AI input voltage is between 3 V and 7 V the AI state is hysteresis And then b7 10 is used to determine whether high level valid or low level valid when AI is used as DI The setting of AI used as DI function is the same as that of DI For details see the descriptions of DI setting The following figure takes AI input voltage as an example to describe the relationship between AI input voltage and corresponding DI state 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual AI output voltage A DC_7V DC 3V ON Time t Al terminals state OFF Diagram 6 22 Relationship of AI input voltage and corresponding DI status Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b7 11 VDO1 function selection 0 ae with physical DIx internally 38 b7 12 VDO2 function selection 0 ae with physical DIx internally 38 b7 13 VDO3 function selection 0 s with physical Dix internally 38 b7 14 VDO4 function selection UA with physical Dix internally 38 0 t with physical Dix internall b7 15 VDOS function selection ae MORE eg hare 38 b7 16 VDO output delay 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s b7 17 VDO2 output delay 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s b7 18 VDO3 output delay 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s b7
152. hover If the DI is OFF group 1 C0 06 C0 08 is selected If the DI is ON group 2 C0 09 to C0 11 is selected If you select automatic switchover when the absolute value of the deviation between PID feedback and PID setting is smaller than the value of C0 13 group 1 is selected When the absolute value of the deviation between PID feedback and PID setting is higher than the value of C0 14 group 2 is selected When the deviation is between C0 13 and C0 14 the PID parameters are the linear interpolated value of the two groups of parameter values A PID parameters 1 PID parameters 2 gt PID deviation c0 13 c0 14 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default C0 16 PID initial value 0 0 100 0 0 0 co 17 PP initial value f0 00s 650 00s 0 00s holding time When the frequency inverter starts up the PID output initial value C0 16 and sustain the holding time C0 17 the PID start close loop calculation Output frequency A PID initial value _ 5 C0 16 TS gt Time t gt PID initial value holding time C0 17 Diagram 5 27 PID initial value function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Frequency upper limit C0 18 of PID reverse 0 00 maximum frequency 2 00 Hz rotation In some situations only when the PID output frequency is a negative value frequency inverter reverse rotation PID setting and PID feedback can be equal Ho
153. hrough Asynchronous motor complete auto tuning or Synchronous motor no load auto tuning Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 40 22 Encoder installation 0 0 359 9 0 0 angle This parameter is applicable only to synchronous motor It is valid for ABZ incremental encoder UVW incremental encoder resolver and wire saving UVW encoder but invalid for SIN COS encoder It can be obtained through synchronous motor no load auto turning or with load auto tuning After installation of the synchronous motor is complete the value of this parameter must be obtained by motor auto tuning Otherwise the motor cannot run properly Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default U V W phase 0 F d d0 23 sequence of UVW ee 0 1 Reverse encoder 0 24 UVW encoder angle 0 0 359 9 0 0 offset These two parameters are valid only when the UVW encoder is applied to a synchronous motor They can be obtained by synchronous motor no load auto tuning or with load auto tuning After installation of the synchronous motor is complete the values of these two parameters must be obtained by motor auto tuning Otherwise the motor cannot run properly Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 28 Number of pole pairs 1 99 1 of resolver If a resolver is applied set the number of pole pairs properly 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual 103
154. ible Causes Solutions pegenn Er22 1 Overvoltage exists 1 Handle based on over voltage PF e 2 Over current exists 2 Handle based on over current hardware fault Short cmonit En23 The motor is short circuited to the Replace the cable or motor to ground ground ee E26 The accumulative running time reaches Clear the record through parameter TARE IIE S the setting value A0 09 reached 1 The signal of user defined fault 1 is User defined Err27 input via DI 1 Reset the operation fault 1 2 The signal of user defined fault 1 is 2 Reset the operation input via virtual I O 1 The signal of user defined fault 2 is User defined Err28 input via DI 1 Reset the operation fault 2 si 2 The signal of user defined fault 2 is 2 Reset the operation input via virtual I O rimina ye Err29 The accumulative power on time reaches Clear the record through parameter P the setting value A0 09 reached The fr iiverter eiti Check that the load is Off load Err30 e trequency inverter running curren 1S disconnected or the parameter lower than the setting value ae setting 1s correct E Err31 The PID feedback is lower than the Check the PID feedback signal or ming setting of C0 26 set C0 26 to a proper value running Byway 1 The load is too heavy or locked rotor 1 Reduce the load and check the y iy Erro occurs on the motor motor and mechanical condition tees alk nm 2 The frequency inverter model is of too 2 Select a frequency inverter of 8 small
155. ielded cable grounding COM COM Single end of shielded cable grounding Diagram 3 14 Wiring of digital input terminals in four different modes 3 10 6 Wiring of digital output terminals when using internal and external power supply EM11 aay Fi EMI11 Ni elay I DOI 50 aT 30v_ gt Coy Relay o CME The external short i citonit metal tonduct r Remove the external ci ermi short circuit metal como control termina COM conductor of control terminal 3 15 Internal power supply wiring 3 16 External power supply wiring Note When external power supply is adopted please connect negative end of external power supply with terminal COM The maximum current of open collector output is 50mA If the external load is a relay 30 EM11 User s Manual 3 Installation of Frequency Inverter 4 Operation and display EM11 User s Manual please install a fly wheel diode to the two sides of relay Please correctly install the polarity of fly wheel diode otherwise control card and DSP can be damaged 4 Operation and display 3 10 7 Description of Control Circuit Jumper 4 1 Instruction of operation and display V e ON J4 KEYPAD cow LIL RUN DIR LOCAL TRIP ol T A Digital display ON i J Unit indicator OFF Multi function key J5 J6 J3 j Menu Exit E Data Confirm key Jumper Name Fu
156. ime 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s b3 23 DI5 ON delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s b3 24 DI5 OFF delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s These parameters are used to set the delay time of the frequency inverter when the status of DI terminals changes The DII to DIS support the delay time function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit DI valid mode 0 Low level valid 1 High level valid Ten s digit DI2 valid mode 0 1 same as DIL b3 25 DI valid selection 1 Hundred s digit DI3 valid mode 0 1 same as DI1 Thousand s digit DI4 valid mode 00000 Code Name Value Function Description b3 13 Terminal command mode 3 Three line 2 b3 00 DII function selection 1 RUN enabled b3 01 DI2 function selection 2 Forward or reverse b3 02 DI3 function selection 3 Three line control Forward button SB2 7 DI Run command Stop button SB1 K Runnin mm P A Re U DI3 Stop running 0 Forward TANIME Reverse button SB3 T DI Running direction 0 Reverse running COM digital common Diagram 5 13 Setting of three line mode 2 As shown in the preceding figure if SB1 is ON the frequency inverter starts running when SB2 is pressed to be ON the frequency inverter instructs forward rotation when K is OFF and instructs reverse rotation when K is ON The Frequency inverter stops immediately after SB1 becomes OFF During normal startup and runn
157. ime to C3 03 Swing frequency cycle Triangular wave rising time C3 03 Swing frequency cycle x C3 04 Triangular wave rising time coefficient unit s Triangular wave falling time C3 03 Swing frequency cycle x 1 C3 04 Triangular wave rising time coefficient unit s Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default C3 05 Set length 0m 65535 m 1000 m C3 06 Actual length 0m 65535 m Om c3 7 Number of pulses per ig 1 65535 100 0 meter The above parameters are used for fixed length control The length information is collected by DI terminals C3 06 Actual length is calculated by dividing the number of pulses collected by the DI terminal by C3 07 Number of pulses each meter When the actual length C3 06 exceeds the set length in C3 05 the DO terminal set with function Length reached becomes ON 99 100 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual During the fixed length control the length reset operation can be performed via the DI terminal For details see the descriptions of b3 00 to b3 11 Please set corresponding DI terminal with function 30 Length count input in applications If the pulse frequency is high DI6 terminal must be used Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default C3 08 Set count value 1 65535 1000 c3 o9 Pesignated count 65535 1000 value The
158. inate external faults i E 2 Perform the motor auto tuning 2 Motor auto tuning is not performed A Over current 3 The voltaze istoo low 3 Adjust the voltage to normal at constant En04 l A gudden load is added during 8 speed operation uring 4 Remove the added load 5 The frequency inverter model is of too oe Selectan Frequency imverter ot higher power class small power class 1 The input voltage is too high e the Solace tO Normal 2 An external force drives the motor ee 1 Overvoltage diring acceleration 2 Cancel the external force or during Err05 g IT install a braking resistor 3 The acceleration time is too short EE acceleration A f 3 Increase the acceleration time 4 The braking unit and braking resistor f t installed 4 Install the braking unit and aye braking resistor 1 The input voltage is too high oe the voltagentocnormal 2 An external force drives the motor aa Overvoltage durna deceleration 2 Cancel the external force or during Err06 8 re install the braking resistor ee 3 The deceleration time is too short i S deceleration P 3 Increase the deceleration time 4 The braking unit and braking resistor f ate not installed 4 Install the braking unit and j braking resistor Overvoltage 1 The input voltage is too high be adjust the voltage to normal at constant Err07 2 An external force drives the motor t 8S speed urine descleraticn 2 Cancel the external force or P g i
159. ing SB1 must remain ON SB2 is effective immediately after ON action Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b3 14 Terminal UP DOWN rate 0 001Hz s 65 535 Hz s 0 100 Hz s It is used to adjust the ratio of changing of frequency for per second when the frequency is adjusted by means of terminal UP DOWN 0 1 same as DI1 Ten thousand s digit DIS valid mode 0 1 same as DIL Unit s digit DI6 valid mode 0 1 same as DI1 Ten s digit DI7 valid mode 0 1 same as DIL Hundred s digit DI8 state 0 1 same as DIL Thousand s digit DI9 valid mode 0 1 same as DI1 Ten thousand s digit DI10 valid mode 0 1 same as DI1 hese parameters are used to set the valid mode of DI terminals Low level valid he DI terminal is invalid when being connected with COM and valid when being disconnected from COM High level valid he DI terminal is valid when being connected with COM and invalid when being disconnected from COM b3 26 DI valid selection 2 00000 Sesiedg mn 5 Group b4 Output Terminals he EM11 provides an analog output AO terminal a digital output DO terminal a relay terminal and a 4 59 60 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes FM terminal used for high speed pulse output or open collector switch signal output as standard If these output terminals cannot satisfy requirements use an optional I O extension card
160. ing component 2 9 1 Selection of braking resistance value 2 9 2 Selection power of braking resistor 2 9 3 Braking resistor connection description SPeeeeee CADARUHWAARRARARARRWWWWWWNNE EEE 3 1 Installation environment 3 2 Installation direction and space 3 3 Peripheral Devices Connection Diagram 3 4 Instructions of Main Circuit Peripheral Devices 3 5 Model Selection of Main Circuit Peripheral Devices 3 6 Removal and mounting of operating panel and cover 3 6 1 Removal and mounting of operating panel keypad 3 6 2 Removal and Mounting of Frequency Inverter 3 7 Connection Terminals Diagram Description 3 8 Sketch and Description of Main Circuit Terminals II EM11 User s Manual Table of Contents a n an Description of Function Codes 3 8 1 Function and description of Main Circuit Terminals 3 9 Cautions for Main Circuit Wiring 3 9 1 Power Supply Wiring 3 9 2 Motor Wiring 3 9 3 Grounding Wiring 3 9 4 Countermeasures for Conduction and Radiation Interference 3 10 Control Circuit and Main Circuit Terminals Description 3 10 1 Control Circuit and Main Circuit Wiring 3 10 2 Control Circuit Terminal Layout 3 10 3 Description of control circuit terminals 3 10 4 Wiring of Analog Input Terminals 3 10 5 Wiring of Multi functional Input Terminals 3 10 6 Wiring of digit
161. ing the contactor ON OFF Failure to comply will result in damage to the frequency inverter 1 1 7 Maintenance A Danger Do not repair or maintain the frequency inverter at power on Failure to comply will result in electric shock Repair or maintain the frequency inverter only after the charge light on frequency inverter is powered off This allows for the residual voltage in the capacitor to discharge to a safe value Failure to comply will result in personal injury Repair or maintenance of the frequency inverter may be performed only by qualified personnel Failure to comply will result in personal injury or damage to the frequency inverter 1 2 General Precautions 1 2 1 Motor insulation test Perform the insulation test when the motor is used for the first time or when it is reused after being stored for a long time or in a regular check up in order to prevent the poor insulation of motor windings from damaging the frequency inverter The motor must be disconnected from the frequency inverter during the insulation test A 500 V mega Ohm meter is recommended for the test The insulation resistance must not be less than 5 MQ 1 2 2 Thermal protection of motor If the rated capacity of the motor selected does not match that of the frequency inverter especially when the frequency inverter s rated power is greater than the motor s adjust the motor protection parameters on the operation panel of the frequency inverter or insta
162. input limit exceeded b7 11 31 When the AIl input exceeds the limit VDO1 becomes ON At this moment VDI1 becomes ON and the frequency inverter receives you defined fault 1 Then the frequency inverter reports Err27 and stops Example 2 Decided by b7 06 The VDI state is determined by b7 06 For example to implement the function that the frequency inverter automatically enters the running state after power on perform the following setting 1 Set VDI with function 1 Forward RUN FWD 67 00 1 Set b7 05 to xxx1 The state of VDI1 is decided by b7 06 Set b7 06 to xxx1 VDI is valid Set b0 02 to 1 The command source to terminal control Set b2 32 to 0 Startup protection is not enabled GB 2 SS When the frequency inverter completes initialization after power on it detects that VDI1 is valid and VDI1 is set with the function of forward RUN That is the frequency inverter receives the forward RUN command from the terminal Therefore the frequency inverter starts to run in forward direction Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 67 07 Function selection for AI1 0 49 0 used as DI 67 08 Function selection for AI2 0 49 o used as DI b7 09 Function selection for AI3 0 49 0 used as DI Unit s digit AI 0 High level valid f j 1 Low level valid b7 10 Valid state selection for AI Ten s digit A12 0 used as DI Sie qi 0 1 same as unit s digit Hundred s digit AI3 0 1 same as unit s digit T
163. ion 1 Set frequency bb 36 for continuing to run 2 Frequency upper limit 0 of fault 3 Frequency lower limit 4 Backup frequency of abnormality bb 37 bb 37 Backup frequency of 9 904 100 0 maximum frequency 1 0 abnormality If a fault occurs during the running of the frequency inverter and the handling of fault is set to continue to run the frequency inverter displays A and continues to run at the frequency set in bb 36 The setting of bb 37 is a percentage relative to the maximum frequency 5 13 Group bC Fault detection Parameters Code Parameter Name Setting Range bC 00 Ist fault type 0 99 bC 01 2nd fault type 0 99 bC 02 3rd fault type latest 0 99 It is used to record the types of the most recent three faults of the frequency inverter 0 indicates no fault For possible causes and solution of each fault refer to Chapter 8 Code Parameter Name Description bC 03 cee ue latest It displays the frequency when the latest fault occurs bC 04 sage latest It displays the current when the latest fault occurs bC 05 De Bus yoltagevt It displays the DC bus voltage when the latest fault occurs latest fault It displays the status of all DI terminals when the latest fault occurs The sequence is as follows bC 06 Input terminals BIT9 BIT8 BIT7 BIT6 BITS BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BITO status
164. ion 2 Hundred s digit Reserved bb 29 Under voltage 50 0 150 0 100 0 Thousand s digit Motor Overheat Err25 threshold Same as unit s digit in bb 32 It is used to set the under voltage threshold of Err09 The under voltage threshold 100 of the frequency Ten thousand s digit Running time reached Err26 inverter of different voltage classes corresponds to different nominal values as listed in the following table Same as unit s digit in bb 32 a i Nominal Value of under Unit s digit User defined fault 1 Err27 oltage Class voltage threshold Same as unit s digit in bb 32 Single phase 220 V 200 V Ten s digit User defined fault 2 Err28 Same as unit s digit in bb 32 Thtee phase 220V cal Hundred s digit Accumulative power on time Three phase 380 V 350 V reached Err29 Three phase 480 V 450 V Same as unit s digit in bb 32 Three phase 690 V 650 V bb 34 Fault protection Thousand s digit Off load Err30 00000 Three phase 1140V 1350V action selection 3 0 Free stop 1 Stop according to the stop mode 0 1 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 2 ERANA snes moror pira a P bb 30 Brake unit use ratio 0 100 100 ee i aa aca s gt rar A setting frequency It is valid only for the frequency inverter with internal braking unit and used to adjust the duty ratio of the Ten thousand s digit PID feedback lost during running braking unit The larger the value of this parameter is the better the braking result will be However too Err31 larger
165. iority 1 Enabled 0 0 Setting power on time coy reach threshold oe oh S Setting running time 2i cobs reach threshold Vas oh z b2 22 Archon after running 0 Continue to run 0 time reached 1 Stop E 0 F king duri i b2 23 Cooling fan control TU tee eee E 0 0 1 Fan working during power on b2 24 Dormant frequency 0 00Hz wakeup frequency b2 26 0 00 Hz 0 b2 25 Dormant delay time _ 0 0s 6000 0s 0 0s 0 D t fr b2 24 i b2 26 Wakeup frequency orant es ee 0 00 Hz frequency b0 13 b2 27 Wakeup delay time _ 0 0s 6000 0s 0 0s 0 B 0 Disabled _ b2 28 Timing function 1 Enabled 0 0 0 b2 30 1 All E 2 AI2 7 b2 29 Timing duration source 3 AB 0 0 100 of analog input corresponds to the value of b2 30 b2 30 Timing duration 0 0min 6500 0 min 0 0 min 0 This time running time b2 31 reached threshold 0 0min 6500 0 min 0 0 min 0 0 No 2 b2 32 Startup protection 1 Yes 0 0 Group b3 Switch Input Terminal Parameters Appendix II EM11 User s Manual 147 Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property b3 00 DI1 function selection b3 01 DI2 function selection b3 02 DI3 function selection b3 03 DI4 function selection b3 04 DIS function selection b3 05 DI6 HDI function selection b3 06 DI7 function selection extend b3 07 DI8 function selection extend 0 No function 1 Forward RUN FWD or run
166. is radiation interference of the inverter and the other is conduction interference of the inverter These two types of interferences cause the surrounding electric equipment to suffer electromagnetic or electrostatic induction The surrounding equipment hereby produces error action For different interferences it can be handled by referring to the following methods 1 For the measuring meters receivers and sensors their signals are generally weak If they are placed nearby the inverter or together with the inverter in the same control cabinet they are easy to suffer interference and thus generate error actions It is recommended to handle with the following methods Put in places far away from the interference source do not arrange the signal cables with the power cables in parallel and never bind them together both the signal cables and power cables employ shielded cables and are well earthed install ferrite magnetic ring with suppressing frequency of 30 to 1 000MHz at the output side of the inverter and wind it 2 to 3 cycles install EMC output filter in more severe conditions 2 YS When the equipment suffering interferences and the inverter use the same power supply it may cause conduction interference If the above methods cannot remove the interference it shall install EMC filter between the inverter and the power supply refer to Section 7 3 6 for the prototyping operation the surrounding equipment is separately earthed which can
167. ise the frequency inverter may overheat and alarm Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default der DEWMswitchover 1 O0H7 15 00 Hz 12 00 Hz frequency upper limit This parameter is valid only for V F control It is used to determine the wave modulation mode in V F control of asynchronous motor If the frequency is lower than the value of this parameter the waveform is 7 segment continuous modulation If the frequency is higher than the value of this parameter the waveform is 5 segment intermittent modulation The 7 segment continuous modulation causes more wastage of IGBT switches of the frequency inverter but smaller current ripple The 5 segment intermittent modulation causes less wastage of IGBT switches of the frequency inverter but larger current ripple This parameter may lead to motor running instability at high frequency Do not modify this parameter generally For instability of V F control refer to parameter d2 10 For wastage of frequency inverter and temperature rising please refer to parameter d6 00 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default PWM modulation 0 Asynchronous modulation d6 02 0 mode 1 Synchronous modulation This parameter is valid only for V F control Synchronous modulation indicates that the carrier frequency varies linearly with the change of the output frequency ensuring that the ratio of carrier frequency to output frequency remains unchanged Synchrono
168. ively define the time proportions of the start segment and the end segment of S curve acceleration deceleration A In Diagram 6 4 tl is the time defined in b0 23 within which the slope of the output frequency change increases gradually t2 is the time defined in b0 24 within which the slope of the output frequency change gradually decreases to 0 Within the time between tl and t2 the slope of the output frequency change remains unchanged that is linear acceleration deceleration 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual 45 A Output frequency Hz Setting frequency fset 0 i H i i i i i gt tl i t2 TE t4 Time t Diagram 5 4 S curve acceleration deceleration A Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default i O 1s 0 25 meneame Deceleration 1 0 1s 1 time unit 2 0 01s To satisfy requirements of different applications the EM11 provides three acceleration deceleration time units 1s 0 1s and 0 01s Note Modifying this parameter will make the decimal places of all frequency related parameters change and corresponding frequency values change Pay attention for this in on site application Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Maximum frequency b0 13 Acceleration Deceleration b0 26 bae 1 Set frequency 0 time base frequency 2 100 Hz The acceleration deceleration time indicates the time for the frequency inverter to increase from 0 Hz
169. k 1 Safety Information and Precautions EM11 User s Manual F Warning Never connect the power supply cables to the output terminals U V W of the Frequency inverter Failure to comply will result in damage to the frequency inverter Make sure that all the connecting wires comply with the requirement of EMC and the safety standard in the region Use wire sizes recommended in the manual Failure to comply may result in accidents Never connect the braking resistor between the DC bus terminals P and P Failure to comply may result in a fire 1 1 4 Before power on A Danger Check that the following requirements comply with The voltage class of the power supply is consistent with the rated voltage class of the frequency inverter The input terminals R S T and output terminals U V W are properly connected No short circuit exists in the peripheral circuit The wiring is fastened Failure to comply will result in damage to frequency inverter Cover the frequency inverter properly before power on to prevent electric shock A Warning Do not perform the voltage resistance test on any part of the frequency inverter because such test has been done in the factory Failure to comply will result in accidents All peripheral devices must be connected properly under the instructions described in this manual Failure to comply will result in accidents 1 1 5 After power on A Danger Do not open th
170. l diag Deceleration timein 0 004 120 005 0 10s 0 torque control Group d2 V F Control Parameters 0 Linear V F 1 Multi point V F 2 Square V F 3 1 2 power V F d2 00 V F curve setting 4 1 4 power V F 0 o 6 1 6 power V F 8 1 8 power V F 10 V F complete separation 11 V F half separation 0 0 torque auto boost d2 01 Torque boost 0 1 30 0 0 a 0 0 80 0 Cut off fi f d2 02 G a ee R Actual cut off frequency Motor rated 50 0 0 2 frequency d2 02 Multi point V F 2 03 hea sas 0 00 Hz d2 05 0 00 Hz 0 frequency 1 F1 Multi point V F volt d2 04 r Pee Yit VO tage 0 09 100 0 0 0 0 1 V1 Multi point V F 2 05 DAD d2 03 to d2 07 0 00 Hz 0 frequency 2 F2 Multi point V F voltage d2 06 0 0 100 09 0 09 2 V2 h h I Multi point V F d2 07 RAS d2 05 maximum frequency 0 00 Hz o frequency 3 F3 Multi point V F voltage d2 08 0 0 100 09 0 09 3 V3 h A I VIF sli ti d2 09 Sap compensation 9 0 200 0 0 0 0 coefficient V F oscillati d2 10 oser anon 1100 0 D suppression gain 0 Digital setting d2 13 1 All 2 AI2 3 AI3 4 Pulse setting DI6 Volt for V F d2 12 908e Some OT 1 S Multi function 0 0 7 6 Simple PLC 7 PID 8 Communication setting Note 100 0 corresponds to the rated motor voltage d2 13 Voltage digital setting 0 V rated motor voltage 0V 0 72 EM11 User s Manual Appendix II Code Parameter Name Setting ran
171. l faults circuited 2 Perform the motor auto tuning 2 Motor auto tuning is not performed 3 Increase the acceleration time 3 The acceleration time is too short 4 Adjust the manual torque boost 4 Manual torque boost or V F curve isjor V F curve Over current not appropriate 5 Adjust the voltage to normal during Err02 5 The voltage is too low range acceleration 6 The startup operation is performed on 6 Select rotational speed tracking the rotating motor restart or start the motor after it 7 A sudden load is added during stops acceleration 7 Remove the added load 8 The frequency inverter model is of too 8 Select a frequency inverter of small power class higher power class I The output circuit is grounded or short 1 Eliminate extemal faults circuited banat 2 Perform the motor auto tuning 2 Motor auto tuning is not performed eee i Meee 3 Increase the deceleration time Over current 3 The deceleration time is too short 4 Adiust the voltase to snormal during Err03 4 The voltage is too low range J 8 deceleration 5 A sudden load is added during S Remove the added load deceleration 6 Install the braking unit and 6 The braking unit and braking resistor g g braking resistor are not installed 128 EM11 User s Manual 7 Fault Diagnosis and Solution Fault Name Display Possible Causes Solutions P E cireuit 1s grounided or short 1 Elim
172. layed during the running set the corresponding bit to 1 and set b9 03 to the hexadecimal equivalent of this binary number 0x0800 parameters 2 Heatsink temperature display C Communication setting value Encoder feedback speed Hz Main frequency X display Hz Auxiliary frequency Y display Hz Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Linear speed LED display runnin Current power on time Hour b9 03 pay g Current running time Minute 0x0800 These two parameters are used to set the monitoring parameters that can be viewed when the frequency inverter is in the running state You can view a maximum of 32 running state The displaying sequence is displayed from the lowest bit of b9 02 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0000 FFFF 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Setting frequency Hz Bus voltage V DI input status DO output status AIl voltage V AI2 voltage V AI3 voltage V Count value LED display b9 04 parameter of 1s 1413 12 11 10 9 8 0x2033 stopping Length value PLC stage Load speed PID setting Pulse setting frequency kHz Heatsink temperature display C Reserved Reserved If a parameter needs to be displayed during the running set
173. lculate CRC correction Error types 01 Command code error 02 Address error 03 Data error 04 Command cannot to process RTU frame format Frame start START More than the 3 5 character time Slave address ADR Communication address 1 to 247 0 broadcast address 03 Read slave parameters Command code CMD 3 06 Write slave parameters It indicates the external parameter address of frequency inverter in Function code address H hexadecimal format There are functional code or non functional code such as running state parameter running command parameters type parameters for details see the address definition Function code address L During the transmission high bit is put in the front and low bit is at the back It indicates the number of function code ready by the frame If it is 1 Number of function code H Rah eat 5 De then it indicates that it reads one function code During the transmission high bit is put in the front and low bit is at the back Only one function code can be modified at one time without the field Number of function code L 135 136 Appendix I EM11 User s Manual EM11 User s Manual Appendix I Data H It indicates the replying data or the data waiting to write in During the Data L transmission high bit is put in the front and low bit is at the back END 3 5 character time CRC Checking I
174. ld weakening area PM field weakening 0 Invalid field weakening d1 21 mode of synchronous 1 Direct calculation 1 a motor 2 Automatic adjustment PM field weakening dl 22 depth of synchronous 50 500 100 0 motor Maximum current of ee PM field weakening 1300 NM 0 PM Field weakening dl 24 automatic adjustment 0 10 5 00 1 00 o gain d1 25 a Field weakening 2 10 2 0 integral multiple 0 Digital setting d1 27 1 All 2 AI2 3 AI3 Torque setting source in 4 Pulse setting DI6 d1 26 Hae s 0 E torque control 5 Communication setting 6 MIN AI1 AI2 7 MAX AIL AI2 Full range of values 1 7 corresponds to the digital setting of d1 27 a1 27 Torque digital setting in 00 004200 0 100 0 o torque control 0 Digital setting 1 ATI Forward speed limit in 2 AI2 aes torque control 3 AI3 9 0 4 Pulse setting DI6 5 Communication setting 0 Digital setting 1 ATI Reverse speed limit in 2 AI2 ree torque control 3 AI3 0 4 Pulse setting DI6 5 Communication setting Forward maximum d1 30 frequency in torque 0 00 Hz maximum frequency b0 13 50 00 Hz o control Reverse maximum dl 31 frequency in torque 0 00 Hz maximum frequency b0 13 50 00 Hz o control Appendix II EM11 User s Manual 171 Code Parameter Name Setting range Default _ Property d 32 Acceleration timein 0 005 120 005 0 10s 0 torque contro
175. le with allocating functions of DI 8 switches over to the DC braking state DI and D 13 by setting b3 00 to b3 02 When this terminal becomes ON the frequency inverter s this 0 Two line mode 1 R 49 Clear this time running time __ time running time is cleared This function must be supported by It is the most commonly used two line mode in which the forward reverse rotation of the motor is decided b2 28 and b2 31 by DII and DI2 The parameters are set as below The four multi function terminals have 16 state combinations corresponding to 16 reference values as listed in the following table Code Name Value Function Description b3 13 Terminal command mode 0 Two line 1 K4 K3 K2 K1 Reference Setting Corresponding Parameter b3 00 DI function selection 1 Forward RUN FWD OFF OFF OFF OFF Reference 0 C1 00 b3 01 DI2 function selection 2 Reverse RUN REV OFF OFF OFF ON Reference 1 C1 01 OFF OFF ON OFF Reference 2 C1 02 Running OFF OFF ON ON Reference 3 C1 03 Kl K2 direction KI OFF ON OFF OFF Reference 4 C1 04 i E OaE as OFF ON orf ON Reference 5 C1 05 me K2 OFF ON ON OFF Reference 6 C1 06 Se eee OFF ON ON ON Reference 7 C1 07 i REY ON OFF OFF OFF Reference 8 C1 08 ON OFF OFF ON Reference 9 C1 09 j Stor ON OFF ON OFF Reference 10 C1 10 L COM digital common ON orF ON ON Reference 11 C1 11 l i SLOR ON ON OFF OFF Reference 12 C1 12 ON ON OFF ON Reference 13 C1 13 Diagram 5 10 Setting of two line mode 1
176. lection 0 49 0 VDI1 VDIS have the same functions as DI terminals on the control board and can be used for digital input For more details see description of b3 00 b3 11 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit VDI 0 Valid decided by state of VDOx 1 Valid decided by b7 06 Ten s digit VDI2 0 1 same as VDI1 b7 05 VDI state setting mode Hundred s digit VDI3 00000 0 1 same as VDI1 Thousand s digit VDI4 0 1 same as VDI1 Ten thousand s digit VDIS 0 1 same as VDI1 Unit s digit VDI 0 Invalid 1 Valid Ten s digit VDI2 0 1 same as VDI1 b7 06 VDI state setting Hundred s digit VDI3 00000 0 1 same as VDI1 Thousand s digit VDI4 0 1 same as VDI1 Ten thousand s digit VDIS5 0 1 same as VDI1 72 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes Different from DI terminals VDI state can be set in two modes selected in b7 05 For example 1 Decided by state of VDOx Whether the state of VDI is valid or not that is determined by the state of the corresponding VDO VDI x is uniquely bound to VDO x x is one of 1 5 For example to implement the function that the frequency inverter reports an alarm and stops when the AI1 input exceeds the limit perform the following setting 1 Set VDII with function 44 User defined fault 1 b7 00 44 2 VDI terminal valid is decided by state of VDO1 b7 05 xxx0 3 Set VDO1 with function AI
177. leration Standard time selection b3 05 DI6 HDI function selection 32 Pulse input enabled only for HDI Standard b3 06 DI7 function selection 0 Extended b3 07 DI8 function selection 0 Extended b3 08 DI9 function selection 0 Extended b3 09 DI10 function selection 0 Extended b3 10 DI11 function selection 0 Extended b3 11 DI12 function selection 0 Extended The following table lists the functions available for the DI terminals Table 6 1 Functions of DI terminals Value Function Description 0 No function Set 0 for reserved terminals to avoid malfunction 1 Forward RUN FWD or running command The terminal is used to control forward or reverse running of the 2 Reverse RUN REV or the frequency inverter direction of FED REV 3 Three line control The terminal determines three line control of the frequency inverter For details see the description of b3 13 4 Forward JOG FJOG FJOG indicates forward JOG running while RJOG indicates reverse JOG running The JOG frequency acceleration time and 5 Reverse JOG RJOG deceleration time are described respectively in b2 00 b2 01 and b2 02 53 54 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual Value Function Description 6 Multi function terminal 1 F A The setting of 16 speeds or 16 other references can be 7 Multi function terminal 2 i A
178. ll a thermal relay in the motor circuit for protection 1 2 3 Running at over 50 Hz The frequency inverter provides frequency output of 0 to 3000 Hz Up to 300 Hz is supported if the frequency inverter runs in VC and SVC mode If the frequency inverter is required to run at over 50 Hz consider the bearable capacity of the machine 1 Safety Information and Precautions EM11 User s Manual 1 2 4 Vibration of mechanical device The frequency inverter may encounter the mechanical resonance point at some output frequencies which can be avoided by setting the skip frequency 1 2 5 Motor heat and noise The output of the frequency inverter is pulse width modulation PWM wave with certain harmonic frequencies and therefore the motor temperature noise and vibration are slightly greater than those motor runs at grid power frequency 50 Hz 1 2 6 Voltage sensitive device or capacitor at output side of the Frequency inverter Do not install the capacitor for improving power factor or lightning protection voltage sensitive resistor at the output side of the frequency inverter because the output of the frequency inverter is PWM wave Otherwise the frequency inverter may suffer transient over current and even to be damaged 1 2 7 Contactor at the Input Output side of the frequency inverter When a contactor is installed between the input side of the frequency inverter and the power supply the frequency inverter must not be started or stoppe
179. ltage _ 0 0 3000 0 V It displays the frequency inverter s DC bus voltage Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 03 Output voltage 0V 1140 V It displays the frequency inverter s output voltage in the running state Code Parameter Name Display Range 0 00A 655 35 A Frequency inverter power lt 55 kW 0 0A 6553 5 A Frequency inverter power gt 55 kW It displays the frequency inverter s output current in the running state U0 04 Output current Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 05 Output power 0 32767 115 16 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes It displays the frequency inverter s output power in the running state Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 06 Output torque 200 0 200 0 It displays the frequency inverter s output torque in the running state Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 07 DI state 0 32767 It displays the present state of DI terminals After the value is converted into a binary number each bit corresponds to a DI 1 indicates high level signal and 0 indicates low level signal The corresponding relationship between bits and DIx is described in the following table BitO Bitl Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 BitS Bit6 Bit7 Bit8 Bit9 DII DI2 DI3 DI4 DIS DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 BitlO Bitll Bitl2 Bitl3 BitlO Bitll Bitl2 Bitl3 Bitl4 Bitl5 VDI1 VDI2 VDI3 VDI4 VDI VDI2 VDI3 VDI4 VDI5S
180. luding digital setting b0 15 AI pulse setting or communication setting If the frequency upper limit is set by means of AIl AI2 AI3 DIS or communication the setting is similar to that of the main frequency source X For details see the description of b0 03 For example to avoid runaway in torque control mode in winding machine application you can set the frequency upper limit by means of analog input When the frequency inverter reaches the upper limit it will run at this limited speed Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default ok Frequency lower limit b0 17 maximum b0 15 Frequency upper limit frequency b0 13 50 00 Hz This parameter is used to set the frequency upper limit Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b0 16 Frequency upper limit offset 0 00 Hz maximum frequency b0 13 0 00 Hz If the source of the frequency upper limit is analog input or pulse setting the final frequency upper limit is obtained by adding the offset in this parameter to the frequency upper limit set in b0 14 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b0 17 Frequency lower limit 0 00 Hz frequency upper limit b0 15 0 00 Hz If the frequency command is lower than the value of this parameter the frequency inverter can stop or run at the frequency lower limit or run at zero speed The result can be determined by b2 17 setting frequency lower than frequency lower limit running mode 5 Description of Function
181. mmand the slave machine return is one byte more than the standard Modbus protocol s for details refer to communication data structure of this protocol Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Per ERA 0 0 01A reading curren 1 0 1A resolution It is used to confirm the unit of current value when the communication reads the output current 142 EM11 User s Manual Appendix II Appendix II EM11 User s Manual Appendix II Function Code Table If A0 00 is set to a non zero number parameter protection is enabled You must write in correct user password to enter the menu To cancel the password protection function enter with password and set A0 00 to 0 The user defined fast menu can directly enter without password Group A is frequency inverter system parameter Group b is basic function parameters Group C is application parameter Group d is control parameter and Group U is monitoring function parameters The symbols in the function code table are described as follows The parameter can be modified when the frequency inverter is in stop or running state The parameter cannot be modi fied when the frequency inverter is in running state e The parameter is the actually measured value and cannot be modified gt The parameter is factory parameter and can be modified only by the manufacturer Standard Function Parameters
182. mmand word address Command function 2003 0 7FFF indicates 0 100 139 140 EM11 User s Manual Appendix I Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit Modbus baud ratio 0 300 BPS 1 600 BPS 2 1200 BPS bA 01 Baud ratio setting 3 2400 BPS 5 4 5 6 4800 BPS 9600 BPS 19200 BPS 7 38400 BPS This parameter is used to set the data transfer rate from host computer and the frequency inverter Please note that baud ratio of the host computer and the inverter should be consistent Otherwise the communication is impossible The higher the baud ratio is the faster the communication is Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 No check data format lt 8 N 2 gt 1 Even parity check data format lt 8 E 1 gt bA 02 Modbus Data format 2 Odd Parity check data format lt 8 O 1 gt 0 3 No check data format lt 8 N 1 gt Valid for Modbus The host computer and frequency inverter setup data format must be consistent otherwise communication is impossible Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 247 0 Broadcast add bA 03 Broadcast address P 0 Broadcast address 1 0 is broadcast address When the local address is set to 0 that is broadcast address it can realize the broadcast function of host computer Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 20 ms bA 04 i Modbus response time O
183. n b2 28 is valid the terminal becomes ON after 25 Timing reached Kaien the present running time of the frequency inverter reaches the set time 26 Zero current state Refer to the descriptions of b4 24 and b4 25 97 Oufputcurrent limit fp efer to the descriptions of b4 33 and b4 34 exceeded 28 Lower voltage state If the frequency inverter is in lower voltage state the terminal output becomes ON The frequency inverter judges whether the motor load exceeds the Fr avert overload pre warning threshold before performing the protection 29 ERR action If the pre warning threshold is exceeded the terminal becomes P JON For motor overload parameters see the descriptions of bb 01 to bb 03 If the motor temperature reaches the temperature set in bb 27 Motor 30 Motor overheat warning overheat warning threshold the terminal becomes ON You can view the motor temperature by using U0 33 The frequency inverter judges motor overload according to preset 31 o motor overload threshold and terminal becomes ON The overload P g threshold setting refer to bb 01 bb 03 32 Off load If the load becomes 0 the terminal becomes ON 33 AII larger than AT2 When the input of AI is larger than the input of AI2 the terminal becomes ON If AIl input is larger than the value of b5 06 AI input voltage upper 34 AIl input limit exceeded limit or lower than the value of b5 05 AI1 input voltage lower limit the terminal becomes ON 62
184. n 0 100 0 100 0 0 0 C1 01 Multi function 1 100 0 100 0 0 0 C1 02 Multi function2 _ 100 0 100 0 0 0 C1 03 Multi function3 100 0 100 0 0 0 C1 04 Multi function 4 100 0 100 0 0 0 C1 05 Multi function 5 100 0 100 0 0 0 C1 06 Multi function 6 100 0 100 0 0 0 C1 07 Multi function 7 100 0 100 0 0 0 C1 08 Multi function 8 _ 100 0 100 0 0 0 C1 09 Multi function 9 100 0 100 0 0 0 95 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default C1 10 Multi function 10 100 0 100 0 0 0 C1 11 Multi function 11 100 0 100 0 0 0 C1 12 Multi function 12 100 0 100 0 0 0 C1 13 Multi function 13 100 0 100 0 0 0 C1 14 Multi function 14 100 0 100 0 0 0 C1 15 Multi function 15 100 0 100 0 0 0 Multi function can be the setting source of frequency V F separated voltage and process PID The Multi function is relative value and ranges from 100 0 to 100 0 As frequency source it is a percentage relative to the maximum frequency As V F separated voltage source it is a percentage relative to the rated motor voltage As process PID setting source it does not require conversion Multi function can be switched over based on different states of DI terminals For details see the descriptions of group b3 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Set by C1 00 1 ATI 2 AI2 Multi function 0 3 AI3 Qile source 4 Pulse setting DI6 0 5 PID
185. n RTU mode messages include an error checking field that is based on a CRC method The CRC field checks the contents of the entire message The CRC field is two bytes containing al6 bit binary value The CRC value is calculated by the transmitting device which appends the CRC to the message The receiving device recalculates a CRC during receipt of the message and compares the calculated value to the actual value it received in the CRC field If the two values are not equal that means transmission is error The CRC is started by 0xFFFF Then a process begins of applying successive eight bit bytes of the message to the current contents of the register Only the eight bits of data in each character are used for generating the CRC Start and stop bits and the parity bit do not apply to the CRC During generation of the CRC each eight bit character is exclusive ORed with the register contents Then the result is shifted in the direction of the least significant bit LSB with a zero filled into the most significant bit MSB position The LSB is extracted and examined If the LSB was a 1 the register is then exclusive ORed with a preset fixed value If the LSB was a 0 no exclusive OR takes place This process is repeated until eight shifts have been performed After the last eighth shift the next eight bit byte is exclusive ORed with the register s current value and the process repeats for eight more shifts as described above The final contents of
186. n and protection function In case of abnormal fault the protection function will be invoked the inverter will stop output and the faulty relay contact of the inverter will start and the fault code will be displayed on the display panel of the inverter Before consulting the service department the user can perform self check according to the prompts of this chapter analyze the fault cause and find out t solution If the fault is caused by the reasons as described in the dotted frame please consult the agents of inverter or our company directly Among the 35 types of warning information Err22 is hardware over current or over voltage signal In most cases the hardware over voltage fault will cause Err22 alarm Table 7 1 Common faults and solution of the frequency inverter Fault Name Display Possible Causes Solutions I The output circuit is grounded or short 1 Eliminate external faults eat 2 Install a reactor or an output 2 The connecting cable of the motor is filter P too long anes z g Inverter unit 3 The IGBT overheat Check tiee ler anid ithe Err01 s cooling fan protection 4 The internal connections become n Tease 4 Connect all cables properly 5 The main control board is faulty oo emesis suppor j i 6 Ask for technical support 6 The drive board is faulty T A de for technical support 7 The inverter IGBT is faulty ppo 1 The output circuit is grounded or short 1 Eliminate externa
187. n bb 32 Hundred s digit Accumulative power on time reached Err29 Same as unit s digit in bb 32 bb 34 Fault protection action Thousand s digit Off load Err30 00000 T selection 3 0 Free stop 1 Stop according to the stop mode 2 reduce to 7 of rated motor frequency and continue running If the load recovers and it will auto regain to setting frequency Ten thousand s digit PID feedback lost during running Err31 Same as unit s digit in bb 32 162 EM11 User s Manual Appendix II Code Parameter Name Setting range Default _ Property Unit s digit Speed deviation too large Err42 Same as unit s digit in bb 32 bb 35 Fault protection action Ten s digit Motor overspeed Err43 00000 q selection 4 Same as unit s digit in bb 32 Hundred s digit Initial position fault Err51 Same as unit s digit in bb 32 0 Current running frequency Frequency selection for 1 Set frequency bb 36 continuing to run of 2 Frequency upper limit 0 o fault 3 Frequency lower limit 4 Backup frequency of abnormality bb 37 Backup fi f bb 37 720 sup meauency O 0 0 100 0 maximum frequency 1 0 0 abnormality Group bC Fault diagnosis bC 00 Ist fault type e bC 01 2nd fault type e bC 02 3rd fault type latest e bC 03_ Frequency of latest fault e bC 04 Current of latest fault e bC 05 DC Bus voltage of latest _ E fault
188. n code Under the Level III state if there is no blinking digit of this parameter then it indicates that the parameter can not to be modified The possible reasons are 1 This function code is a non modifiable parameter such as the actual testing parameters operation records etc 2 This function code cannot be modified under the running state but can modify after stopping 4 3 Parameter Display Mode The establishment of parameter display is to make the user conveniently to check the parameters in different permutation modes Three kinds of parameter display modes are offered Name Description sequential display the function parameters of frequency inverter includes Function parameter mode parameter group b0 bF COQ C6 do0 d6 AO Al and UO Several function parameters max 32 customized to display are need to Customized parameter mode confirmed by Group Al Modifiable parameter mode The function parameters can be different with the factory parameter Relevant function parameters are A0 08 as follows Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Bit User defined parameter QUICK display selection 0 No Display Display of customized 1 Display parameter Ten bit User changed parameter QUICK display selection 0 No Display 1 Display A0 08 When user defined customized parameters at this time user can switch into different parameter display mode by the QUI
189. nction Description Default Setting Status monitoring Menu mode When the jumper is ON it connects with 485 communication Shift keys selection keys resistor Stop Reset key v im J Running status indicator rN B OFF Up Down key When the jumper is OFF it disconnects with 485 communication resistor i Running key When the jumper is ON DI terminals use internal power supply J4 ON When the jumper is OFF DI terminals use external power supply Diagram 4 1 EM11 main keypad 15 When the jumper is V AI2 is with voltage input 0V 10V Vv Currentudicaton When the jumper is I AI2 is with current input 0mA 20mA voltase tndiestue 16 When the jumper is V AO1 is with voltage output OV 10V y When the jumper is I AO1 is with current output OmA 20mA Data display area Frequency indicator Percentage indicator Speed indicator Control mode indicator Fault alarm indicator Forward indicator Data Enter key Reverse indicator Shift key Menu Exit key Running key Stop Reset key Down key Diagram 4 2 EM11 G1 G3E keypad 1 Description of indicator 31 32 EM11 User s Manual 4 Operation and display RUN OFF indicates that the frequency inverter is in the stop state and ON indicates that the frequency inverter is in the running state LO
190. ncy during 0 Disabled 0 00Hz acceleration deceleration 1 Enabled It is used to set whether the jump frequencies are valid during acceleration deceleration When the jump frequencies are valid during acceleration deceleration and the running frequency is within he frequency jump range the actual running frequency will jump over the set frequency jump amplitude rise directly from the lowest jump frequency to the highest jump frequency The following figure shows he diagram when the jump frequencies are valid during acceleration deceleration Frequency jump amplitude Output frequency 4 Hz Jump frequency 1 gt Time t Diagram 5 7 Diagrams when the jump frequencies are valid during acceleration deceleration 50 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Frequency switchover point b2 13 between acceleration time 1 0 00 Hz maximum frequency 0 00 Hz and acceleration time 2 Frequency switchover point b2 14 between deceleration time 1 0 00 maximum frequency 0 00 Hz and deceleration time 2 This function is valid when motor 1 is selected and acceleration deceleration time switchover is not performed by means of DI terminal It is used to select different groups of acceleration deceleration time based on the running frequency range rather than DI terminal during the running process of the frequency inverter Output fr
191. nd weak current signal cables e g control line shall not be arranged in parallel and vertical arrangement is preferable 3 It is recommended that the output power cables of the inverter employ shield cables or steel pipe shielded cables and that the shielding layer be earthed reliably The lead cables of the equipment suffering interferences are recommended to employ twisted pair shielded control cables and the 6 EMC Electromagnetic compatibility _ EM11 User s Manual 125 shielding layer shall be earthed reliably 4 When the length of motor cable is longer than 100 meters it needs to install output filter or reactor 6 3 3 Handling method for the interferences of the surrounding equipment on the inverter The electromagnetic interference on the inverter is generated because plenty of relays contactors and electromagnetic brakes are installed near the inverter When the inverter has error action due to the interferences the following measures can be taken 1 Install surge suppressor on the devices generating interference 2 Install filter at the input end of the inverter Refer to Section 7 3 6 for the specific operations 3 The lead cables of the control signal cable of the inverter and the detection line employ shielded cable and the shielding layer shall be earthed reliably 6 3 4 Handling method for the interferences of frequency inverter on the surrounding equipment These interferences include two types one
192. near V F 1 Multi point V F 2 Square V F 3 1 2 power V F 4 6 8 d2 00 V F curve setting 1 4 power V F 0 1 6 power V F 1 8 power V F 10 V F complete separation 11 V F half separation 0 Linear V F It is applicable to common constant torque load 1 Multi point V F It is applicable to special load such as dehydrator and centrifuge Any relationship V F curve can be obtained by setting parameters of d2 03 d2 08 2 Square V F It is applicable to centrifugal loads such as fan and pump 3 8 V F curve between linear V F and square V F 10 V F complete separation In this mode the output frequency and output voltage of the frequency inverter are independent The output frequency is determined by the frequency source and the output voltage is determined by Voltage source for V F separation d2 12 It is applicable to induction heating inverse power supply and torque motor control 11 V F half separation In this mode V and F are proportional and the proportional relationship can be set in d2 12 The relationship between V and F are also related to the rated motor voltage and rated motor frequency Assume that the voltage source input is X 0 100 the relationship between V and F is V F 2 x X x Rated motor voltage Rated motor frequency Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 0 torque auto boost d2 01 Torque boost 0 1 30 0 0 10 E
193. nection Sketch Map 3 9 4 Countermeasures for Conduction and Radiation Interference Inverter Inpuriilter Shielded cable 7 n M A ce X g A gt a ae J Wh ee J ZN 3 z A A Ig Ze 7 71 TT Diagram 3 9 Connection of conduction and radiation interference solutions When the input noise filter is installed the wire connecting the filter to the inverter input power end shall be as short as possible The filter enclosure and mounting cabinet shall be reliably grounded in large area to reduce the back flow impedance of the noise current Ig The wire connecting the inverter and the motor shall be as short as possible The motor cable adopts 4 core cable with the grounding end grounded at the inverter side the other end connected to the motor enclosure The motor cable shall be sleeved into the metal tube The input power wire and output motor wire shall be kept away from each other as far as possible The equipment and signal cables vulnerable to influence shall be kept far away from the inverter Key signal cables shall adopt shielding cable It is suggested that the shielding layer shall be grounded with 360 degree grounding method and sleeved into the metal tube The signal cable shall be kept far away from the inverter input wire and output motor wire If the signal cable must cross the input wire and output motor wire they shall be kept ortho
194. ned functi A1 00 Essie eaned uneeer User visible function codes ub0 01 code 0 Al 01 Vserdetned function User visible function codes ub0 02 code 1 defined functi A1 02 User defined fiction User visible function codes ub0 03 code 2 A1 03 User detmed t netei User visible function codes ub0 07 code 3 defined functi A1 04 Yset dgtned tii tion User visible function codes ub0 12 code 4 defined functi A1 05 Userdetned aon User visible function codes ub0 21 code 5 A1 06 Vsersdefined nenon User visible function codes ub0 22 code 6 User defined functi A1 07 E o User visible function codes ub3 00 code 7 defined functi A1 08 User defined function User visible function codes ub3 01 code 8 defined functi A1 09 User defined function User visible function codes ub3 02 code 9 defined functi Al 10 Vserdetmied function User visible function codes ub4 04 code 10 defined functi Al 11 Usei detined function User visible function codes ub6 01 code 11 defined functi Al 12 Userdetined Machen User visible function codes ub1 00 code 12 defined functi Al 13 User defines f nctio User visible function codes ub1 10 code 13 Al 14 User defined function User visible function codes ud2 00 123 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default code 14 defined functi Al 15 Userdefmed function User visible function codes ud2 0
195. ng 0 d4 17 1 AIl Braking torque upper o 2 AI2 d4 15 limit source in speed 0 o control mode Hee 4 Pulse setting DI6 5 Communication setting Digital setting of d4 16 motor driven torque 0 0 200 0 150 0 0 limit Digital setting of d4 17 igita setang ot 0 0 200 0 150 0 0 braking torque limit d4 18 Motor driven slip gain 50 200 100 0 d4 19 Braking slip gain 50 200 100 0 T limit coefficient d4 20 eae I coeton 0 00100 0 40 0 o in field weakening area PM Field weakening 0 Invalid field weakening d4 21 mode of synchronous 1 Direct calculation 1 a motor 2 Adjustment PM Field weakening d4 22 degree of synchronous 50 500 100 0 motor d4 23 Maximum PM field o 300 50 0 weakening current PM Field weakening d4 24 automatic adjustment 0 10 5 00 1 00 o gain 44 25 PM Field weakening 2 10 2 0 integral gain Appendix II EM11 User s Manual 175 Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property 0 Digital setting d4 27 1 All 2 AI2 3 AI3 44 26 Torque setting source in 4 Pulse setting 0 T torque control 5 Communication setting 6 MIN AIl AI2 7 MAX AIl AI2 Full range of values 1 7 corresponds to the digital setting of d4 27 Torque digital setting in d4 27 200 0 200 0 100 0 o torque control 0 Digital setting 1 AIl Forward speed limit in 2 AI2 cree torque control 3 AI3 y q 4 Pulse setting 5
196. nication cable is faulty Communicati ne _ cabling Errl6 3 The communication extension card is Yo on fault 3 Set the communication Sepunptoperly extension card correctl ee y 4 The communication parameters in er oup bA are set improperly 4 Set the communication gr i parameters properly 1 The drive board and power supply are 1 Replace the faulty drive board Contactor 2 fault Errl7 faulty or power supply board 2 The contactor is faulty 2 Replace the faulty contactor Current 1 The HALL device is faulty 1 Replace te famy HALL detection fault 2 The drive board is faulty device 2 Replace the faulty drive board 1 Set the motor parameters Motor 1 The motor parameters are not setjaccording to the nameplate auto tuning Errl9 __Jaccording to the nameplate properly fault 2 The motor auto tuning times out 2 Check the cable connecting the Frequency inverter and the motor 1 The encoder type is incorrect 1 Set the encoder type correctly 2 The cable connection of the encoder is based on the actual situation Encoder fault Err20 __ incorrect 2 Eliminate external faults 3 The encoder is damaged 3 Replace the damaged encoder 4 The PG card is faulty 4 Replace the faulty PG card EEPROM read write Err21 The EEPROM chip is damaged Replace the main control board fault 30 EM11 User s Manual 7 Fault Diagnosis and Solution Fault Name Display Poss
197. ning command 2 Reverse RUN REV or FWD REV running direction 3 Three line control 4 Forward JOG FJOG 5 Reverse JOG RJOG 6 Multi function terminal 1 7 Multi function terminal 2 8 Multi function terminal 3 9 Multi function terminal 4 0 Terminal UP 1 Terminal DOWN 2 clear to zero of UP and DOWN setting terminal keypad 3 Terminal 1 for acceleration deceleration ime selection 4 Terminal 2 for acceleration deceleration ime selection 5 Frequency source switchover 6 Switchover between main frequency source X and preset frequency 7 Switchover between auxiliary frequency source Y and preset frequency 8 Terminal 1 for Command source switchover 9 Terminal 2 for Command source switchover 20 Speed control Torque control switchover 21 Torque control prohibited 22 PID pause 23 PID integral pause 24 Reverse PID action direction 25 PID parameter switchover 26 PLC status reset 27 Swing pause 28 Counter input 29 Counter reset 30 Length count input 31 Length reset 32 Pulse input enabled only for HDI 33 Frequency modification enable 34 Acceleration Deceleration prohibited 35 Motor selection terminal 1 36 Motor selection terminal 2 reserve 37 Fault reset 13 32 48 EM11 User s Manual Appendix II Code Parameter Name Setting ran
198. nly valid for Modbus 2 ms Response delay time it refers to the interval time from the inverter finishes receiving data to sending data to the host machine If the response time is less than the system processing time then the response delay time is based on the time delay of the system processing time If the response delay time is more than the system processing time after the system processes the data it should be delayed to wait until the response delay time is reached then sending data back to host machine Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default ae 0 0s invalid bA 05 Coimmunieation i g 0 0s nmeont Valid for Modbus When the function is set to 0 0s the communication interface timeout parameter is invalid When the function code is set to time value if the interval time between the communication and the next communication is beyond the communication timeout the system will report communication failure error Err16 At normal circumstances it will be set as invalid If in the continuous communication system set this parameter you can monitor the communication status 141 Appendix I EM11 User s Manual Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Modbus protocol data Unit s digit Modbus protocol bA 06 transmission format 0 Non standard Modbus protocol 1 selection 1 Standard Modbus protocol bA 06 1 Select standard Modbus protocol bA 06 0 When reading the co
199. nning command sources can be bound to the same frequency source If a command source has bound to a frequency source this frequency source set in b0 03 b0 07 no longer akes effect when this command source is effective Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 40 10 Record of digital setting 0 not record i frequency of power failure l record This parameter is valid only when the frequency source is digital setting If b0 10 is set to 0 the digital setting frequency value restore to the value of b0 12 Preset frequency after the frequency inverter stops The modification by using keys and WV or the terminal UP DOWN function is cleared to zero If b0 10 is set to 1 the digital setting frequency value is the set frequency at the moment when the frequency inverter stops The modification by using keys and V or the terminal UP DOWN function remains is record and valid Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b0 11 Frequency unit E ee 2 It is used to set the resolution of all frequency related parameters If the resolution is 0 1 Hz the EM11 can output up to 3000 0Hz If the resolution is 0 01 Hz the EM11 can output up to 300 00 Hz Note Modifying this parameter will make the decimal places of all frequency related parameters change and 42 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes corresponding frequency values change display This parameter is not
200. nput 0 00 V 10 00 V 0 00 V Corresponding setting Corresponding setting of AI3 of second point input b5 34 minimum input 100 00 100 0 0 0 Second point input value of Corresponding setting b5 35 P nid 0 00 V 10 00 V 2 50V of minimum input Ga tT a Pu Rica gt Corresponding setting of inimum Secon ird point ourth point aximum cu ta iput politiiput input inpiit input b5 36 second point input value of 100 00 100 0 25 0 Diagram 5 21 Corresponding relationship between analog input and setting values A 5 37 i inti 0 00 V 10 00 V b5 17 AIl filter time is used to set the software filter time of AIl If the analog input is liable to 2 os seers ae ae 2 007 interference increase the value of this parameter to stabilize the detected analog input However increase of b5 38 e ce FOR NE 5 100 00 100 0 50 0 oint input value o the AI filter time will slow down the response of analog detection Set this parameter properly based on TER ne apGialie oF actial conditions b5 39 P a 0 00 V 10 00 V 7 50V In different applications 100 of analog input corresponds to different nominal values For details refer to sJ Corresponding setting of re Seto the description of different applications 227 fourth point EAA 0 For the setting method of AI curve 2 and AI cure 3 please refer to Al curve 1 b5 41 AI3 maximum input 0 00 V 10 00 V 10 00 V p42 Corresponding setting of AI3 100 00 100 0 100 0 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Defaul
201. nquiry Command and 134 EM11 User s Manual Appendix I Appendix I EM11 User s Manual response to the data Here master is personnel computer PC industrial machine or programmable logical controller PLC and the slave is inverter Master not only visits some slave but also sends the broadcast information to all the slaves For the single master Inquiry Command all of slaves will return a signal that is a response for the broadcast information provided by master slave needs not feedback a response to master machine Communication data structure Modbus protocol communication data format of EM11 series inverter is shown as following The inverter only support the reading and writing of Word type parameters the corresponding reading operation command is 0x03 the writing operation command is 0x06 The writing and reading operation of byte or bit is not supported gt 3 5Byte 1Byte 1Byte 2Byte 1Byte 2Byte Master reads Ries Target Read we F Leen code Nwa CRC command frame Start fi station comman address correction and Seam sade 0x037 S21 aa H L Calculate CRC correction In theory the host computer can continuously read several function codes once that is the maximum value of n is 12 but note that not to jump across the last function code in this function group to avoid the wrong reply
202. nstall the braking resistor Control power Err08 The input voltage is not within the Adjust the input voltage to the supply fault allowable range allowable range 1 Instantaneous power failure occurs on the input power supply 1 Reset the fault 2 The frequency inverter s input voltage 2 Adjust the voltage to normal is not within the allowable range range Low voltage Err09 3 The DC bus voltage is abnormal 3 Ask for technical support 4 The rectifier bridge and buffer resistor 4 Ask for technical support are faulty 5 Ask for technical support 5 The drive board is faulty 6 Ask for technical support 6 The main control board is faulty Fredaen 1 The load is too heavy or locked rotor 1 Reduce the load and check the ee Ero occurs on the motor motor and mechanical condition overload 2 The frequency inverter model is of too 2 Select a frequency inverter of small power class higher power class 3 1 Set bb 01 correctly else a improperly 2 Reduce the load and check the 2 The load is too heavy or locked rotor x Motor motor and the mechanical Errll joccurs on the motor SP overload condition 3 The frequency inverter model is of too small power class 3 Select a frequency inverter of higher power class 7 Fault Diagnosis and Solution EM11 User s Manual 129 Fault Name Display Possible Causes Solutions 1 gt The three phas
203. o the ground 2 Ask for technical support 4 The HALL device is faulty 5 The power input to the frequency inverter is too low m eer 1 The motor or the motor output cable is 1 Measure the imsulationot the Err23 is displayed o ia motor and the output cable with 3 at power on short circuited to the ground a megger 2 The frequency inverter is damaged 2 Ask for technical support The frequency 1 Replace the damaged fan 2 Eliminate external fault 131 132 EM11 User s Manual 7 Fault Diagnosis and Solution SN Fault Possible Causes Solutions 1 The setting of carrier frequency is too Err14 IGBT high i i f 1 Reduce the carrier frequency module overheat 2 The cooling fan is damaged or the air d6 00 5 filter is blocked 2 Replace the fan and clean the fault is reported nae frequent 3 Components inside the frequency air filter q y inverter are damaged thermal coupler or 3 Ask for technical support others 1 Check the motor and the motor cables 1 Ensure the cable benween me N g Frequency inverter and the motor The motor does not 2 The frequency inverter parameters are set is normal 6 rotate after the improperly motor parameters 9 Renace the inter orelene frequency inverter 3 The cable between the drive board and ES E mechanical faults runs the control board is in poor contact 3 Check and reset motor 4 The drive board is
204. o the rated motor voltage d2 13 Vole digital soting 0 V rated motor voltage OV for V F separation V F separation is generally applicable to these sites such as induction heating inverse power supply and motor torque control If V F separated control is enabled the output voltage can be set in d2 13 or by analog Multi function simple PLC PID or communication If you set the output voltage by means of non digital setting 100 of the setting corresponds to the rated motor voltage If a negative percentage is set its absolute value is used as the effective value 0 Digital setting d2 13 The output voltage is set directly in d2 13 1 ATI 2 AI2 3 AI3 The output voltage is set by analog input terminals 4 Pulse setting DI6 The output voltage is set by pulses of the terminal DI6 Pulse setting specification voltage range 9V 30 V frequency range 0kHz 100 kHz 5 Multi function 6 Simple PLC If the voltage source is simple PLC mode parameters in group FC must be set to determine the setting output voltage 7 PID The output voltage is generated based on PID closed loop For details see the description of PID in group Co 8 Communication setting The output voltage is set by the host computer by means of communication The voltage source for V F separation is selected in the similar way to the frequency source selection For details see b0 03 main frequency source X specification 100 0 of the setting in eac
205. of latest fault DIO DI9 DI8 DI7 DI6 DIS DI4 DB DR DII If a DI is ON the setting is 1 If the DI is OFF the setting is 0 The value is the equivalent decimal number converted from the DI status It displays the status of all output terminals when the latest fault occurs The sequence is as follows BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BITO bEOT Output terminal DO2 DOI REL2 RELI FMP status of latest fault If an output terminal is ON the setting is 1 If the output terminal is OFF the setting is 0 The value is the equivalent decimal number converted from the DI statuses bC 08 Frequency inverter Reserved status of latest fault bC 09 Poweron time gt It displays the present power on time when the latest fault occurs latest fault 89 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual Code Parameter Name Description bC 10 Running tim of It displays the present running time when the latest fault occurs latest fault bC 11 Frequency of 2nd fault bC 12 Current of 2nd fault DC Bus voltage of bC 13 2nd fault bC 14 Input terminal status of 2nd fault Output terminal Same as bC 03 bC 10 bC 15 status of 2nd fault bC 16 Frequency inverter status of 2nd fault bC 17 Power on time of 2nd fault bC 18 Running time of 2nd fault bC 19 Frequency of 1st fault bC 20 Current of Ist fault bC 21 DC Bus voltage of Ist fault Input terminal status bC 22 of Ist fault Output terminal
206. of load change If this parameter is set to 100 it indicates that the compensation when the motor bears rated load is the rated motor slip The rated motor slip is automatically obtained by the frequency inverter through calculation based on the rated motor frequency and rated motor rotational speed in group d0 Generally if the motor rotational speed is different from the target speed slightly adjust this parameter Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 2 10 V F oscillation 0 100 0 suppression gain The setting method for this parameter is to set as small as possible on the premise of effective oscillation suppression to avoid the badly effect for V F running When there is no oscillation of the motor please set the gain to 0 Only when there is obvious oscillation of the motor you can increase the gain properly The larger the gain is more obviously the effect of oscillation suppression is When the oscillation suppression function is used the parameters of motor rated current and no load current must be set correctly or the effect of oscillation suppression is poor 112 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Digital setting d2 13 1 ATI 2 AI2 3 AI3 d2 12 Voltage source for 4 Pulse setting DI6 6 V F separation 5 Multi function 6 Simple PLC 7 PID 8 Communication setting Note 100 0 corresponds t
207. ol Forward button SB2 T DDI Forward run F WD Stop button SBI mm ODI Running enabled Reverse button SB3 T O DI2 Reverse run REV COM digital common Diagram 5 12 Setting of three line mode 1 As shown in the preceding figure if SB1 is ON the frequency inverter instructs forward rotation when Sb2 is pressed to be ON and instructs reverse rotation when SB3 is pressed to be ON The frequency inverter stops immediately after SB1 becomes OFF During normal startup and running SB1 must remain ON The frequency inverter s running state is determined by the final actions on SB1 SB2 and SB3 3 Three line mode 2 In this mode DI3 is RUN enabled terminal The RUN command is given by DI and the direction is decided by DI2 The parameters are set as below 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual If b0 11 Frequency reference resolution is 2 the setting range is 0 001Hz s 65 535 Hz s 2 Ifb0 11 Frequency reference resolution is 1 the setting range is 0 01Hz s 655 35 Hz s Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b3 15 DII ON delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s b3 16 DII OFF delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s b3 17 DI2 ON delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s b3 18 DI2 OFF delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s b3 19 DI3 ON delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s b3 20 DI3 OFF delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s b3 21 DI4 ON delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s b3 22 DI4 OFF delay t
208. ol board provides two analog input AT terminals AIL AI2 Another AI terminal AI3 is provided by the I O extension card Including All 0V 10 V voltage input AI2 0V 10 V voltage input or 4mA 20 mA current input determined by jumper on the control card AI3 10V 10 V voltage input The corresponding relationship curve between the input voltage of AIl AI2 and AI3 and the target frequency can be user defined When AI is used as the frequency setting source the corresponding value 100 of the voltage current input corresponds to the value of b0 13 Maximum frequency 5 Pulse setting DI6 The frequency is set by DI6 high speed pulse The signal specification of pulse setting is 9V 30V voltage range and 0 kHz 100 kHz frequency range Pulse can be only input by DI6 39 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual The relation between DI6 terminal input pulse frequency and corresponding setting is set by b5 00 b5 03 The corresponding relation is the linear relation of these two points The corresponding value 100 of pulse setting corresponds to the value of b0 13 Maximum frequency 6 Multi function In Multi segment speed mode combinations of different DI terminal states correspond to different set frequencies The EM11 supports a maximum of 16 speeds implemented by 16 state combinations of four DI terminals set with functions 12 to 15 in Group Cl The multiple segments speed indicates
209. ompensation d6 05 compensation mode 1 Compensation mode 1 1 selection 2 Compensation mode 2 Generally you need not modify this parameter Try to use a different compensation mode only when there is special requirement on the output voltage waveform quality or oscillation occurs on the motor For high power frequency inverter compensation mode 2 is recommended Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 SVC mode 0 46 06 SVC mode selection fea 1 1 SVC mode 1 SVC mode 0 Used in the application that high speed stability required SVC mode 1 Used in the application that high torque control linearity required 5 23 Group U0 Monitoring Parameters Group UO is used to monitor the frequency inverter s running state You can view the parameter values by using operation panel convenient for on site commissioning or from the host computer by means of communication address 0x7000 0x7044 U0 00 U0 31 are the monitoring parameters in the running and stop state defined by b9 02 and b9 03 For more details see Table 6 1 Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 00 Running frequency 0 00 300 00 Hz b0 11 2 U0 01 Setting frequency _ 0 00 3000 0 Hz b0 11 1 These two parameters display the absolute value of theoretical running frequency and set frequency For the actual output frequency of the frequency inverter see U0 19 Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 02 DC Bus vo
210. on is applied to the textile and chemical fiber fields and the applications where traversing and winding functions are required The swing frequency function indicates that the output frequency of the frequency inverter swings up and down with the setting frequency as the center The trace of running frequency at the time axis is shown in the following figure The swing amplitude is set in C3 00 and C3 01 When C3 01 is set to 0 the swing amplitude is 0 and the swing frequency does not take effect Output Frequency A Swing amplitude Hz Aw Fset C3 01 Swing frequency upper limit Swing frequency center frequency Swing frequency 7 Br lower limit Textile jump frequency Triangular wave rising Aw C3 02 time t i gt Accelerate by i i i Time t Acceleration Swing frequency cycle Deceleration Running command Time time i Diagram 5 29 Swing frequency control Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default C3 00 Swing frequency 0 Relative to the central frequency E setting mode 1 Relative to the maximum frequency This parameter is used to select the basic value of the swing amplitude 0 Relative to the central frequency b0 07 frequency source selection It is variable swing amplitude system The swing amplitude varies with the central frequency setting frequency 1 Relative to the maximum frequency b0 13 maximum output frequency It is fixed swing amplitude system
211. or overeat gec 200 C 120 C 0 protection threshold Mot heat bb 27 otor overeat OP 20 100 C pre warning threshold bb 28 Overvoltage threshold 200 0 2500 0 V 830 0 V 0 bb 29 Under voltage threshold 50 0 150 0 100 0 0 bb 30 Brake unit use ratio 0 100 100 0 0 Disabled bb 31 Rapid current limit 1 Enabled 1 161 Appendix II EM11 User s Manual Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property Unit s digit Motor overload Err11 0 Free stop 1 Stop according to the stop mode 2 Continue to run Ten s digit Power input phase loss Err12 Same as unit s digi Faultprotection action Hundred s digit Power output phase loss bb 32 Errl3 00000 o selection 1 Mig att Same as unit s digi Thousand s digit External equipment fault Errl5 Same as unit s digi Ten thousand s digit Communication fault Errl6 Same as unit s digi Unit s digit Encoder PG card fault Err20 0 Free stop Ten s digit EEPROM read write fault Err21 0 Free stop Fault protection action 1 Stop according to the stop mode bbe selection 2 Hundred s digit Reserved 99009 O Thousand s digit Motor Overheat Err25 Same as unit s digit in bb 32 Ten thousand s digit Running time reached Err26 Same as unit s digit in bb 32 Unit s digit User defined fault 1 Err27 Same as unit s digit in bb 32 Ten s digit User defined fault 2 Err28 Same as unit s digit i
212. otal of four groups of acceleration deceleration time that is the above three groups and the group b0 21 and b0 22 Definitions of four groups are completely the same for more details see the description of b0 21 and b0 22 You can switch over between the four groups of acceleration deceleration ime through different state combinations of DI terminals For more details see the descriptions of b3 01 to b3 011 49 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b2 09 Jump frequency 1 0 00 Hz maximum frequency 0 00 Hz b2 10 Jump frequency 2 0 00 Hz maximum frequency 0 00 Hz b2 11 Frequency jump amplitude 0 00 Hz maximum frequency 0 00Hz If the setting frequency is within the jump frequency range the actual running frequency is the jump frequency close to the set frequency Setting the jump frequency helps to avoid the mechanical resonance point of the load The EM11 supports two jump frequencies If both are set to 0 the frequency jump function is disabled The principle of the jump frequencies and jump amplitude is shown in the following figure 6 6 Output frequency A Hz Jump frequency 2 i Frequency jump amplitude Jump frequency 1 Frequency jump amplitude gt Time t Diagram 5 6 Principle of the jump frequencies and jump amplitude Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b2 12 Jump freque
213. otor torque at frequency inverter startup set a proper startup frequency In addition to build excitation when the motor starts up the startup frequency must be held for a certain period The startup frequency b1 03 is not restricted by the frequency lower limit If the setting target frequency is lower than the startup frequency the frequency inverter will not start and stays in the holding state During switchover between forward rotation and reverse rotation the startup frequency holding time is disabled The holding time is not included in the acceleration time but in the running time of simple PLC Example 1 b0 03 0 The frequency source is digital setting b0 12 2 00 Hz The digital setting frequency is 2 00 Hz b1 03 5 00 Hz The startup frequency is 5 00 Hz b1 04 2 0s The startup frequency holding time is 2 0s In this example the frequency inverter stays in the holding state and the output frequency is 0 00 Hz Example 2 b0 03 0 The frequency source is digital setting b0 12 10 00 Hz The digital setting frequency is 10 00 Hz b1 03 5 00 Hz The startup frequency is 5 00 Hz b1 04 2 0s The startup frequency holding time is 2 0s In this example the frequency inverter accelerates to 5 00 Hz at 2s and then accelerates to the set frequency 10 00 Hz Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Startup DC braking current Pre excited current Startup DC braking time Pre excited time
214. percentages of the value of b0 13 Maximum frequency If a DI terminal is used for the Multi function function you need to perform related setting in group b3 For details refer to the descriptions of Group b3 7 Simple PLC built in When the simple programmable logic controller PLC mode is used as the frequency source the running frequency of the frequency inverter can be switched over among the 16 frequency references You can set the holding time and acceleration deceleration time of the 16 frequency references For details refer to the descriptions of Group C2 8 PID The output of PID control is used as the running frequency PID control is generally used in on site closed loop control such as constant pressure closed loop control and constant tension closed loop control When applying PID as the frequency source you need to set parameters of PID function in group CO 9 Communication setting The frequency is set by means of communication Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Digital setting Preset frequency b0 12 UP DOWN modifiable no record after power off 1 Digital setting Preset frequency b0 12 UP DOWN modifiable record after power off Auxiliary frequency source Y 2 All mes selection 3 AI2 l 4 AI3 5 Pulse setting DI6 6 Multi function 7 Built in PLC 8 PID 9 Communication setting When used as an independent frequency input channel frequency source switched over from X
215. ple The on site correction is as follows 1 Send a voltage signal approximately 2 V to AI1 2 Measure the AIl voltage and save it to b8 00 3 View the displayed value of U0 21 and save the value to b8 01 4 Send a voltage signal approximately 8 V to AI1 5 Measure AIl voltage and save it to b8 02 6 View the displayed value of U0 21 and save the value to b8 03 At correction of AI2 and AI3 the actually sampled voltage is respectively queried in U0 22 and U0 23 For AIl and A12 2 V and 8 V are suggested as the correction voltages For AI3 8 V and 8V are suggested 75 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b8 12 Tlealvoltage of A01 0 500 4 000 V 2 000V calibration 1 b8 13 Measured voltage of AOL 0 500 4 000 V 2 000 calibration 1 b8 14 ldsalvoltage GFAO 6 000 9 999 V 8 000V calibration 2 Measured voltage of 8 15 6 000 9 999 V i AOlcalibration 2 gees b8 16 Ideal voltage of AOZ 0 500 4 000 V 2 000V calibration 1 68 17 Measured voltage of AO2 0 500 4 000 V 2 000V calibration 1 b8 18 Ileal voltage of A02 6 000 9 999 V 8 000V calibration 2 68 19 Measured voltage of AO2 6 000 9 999 V 8 000V calibration 2 These parameters are used to correct the AO They have been corrected of delivery When you store the factory default values these parameters will be restored to the factory corrected values Gene
216. ple communication It supports communication bus via Modbus RTU protocols PROFIBUS DP CANlink and CANopen The optional I O extension card enables AI3 to receive the Motor overheat protection motor temperature sensor input PT100 PT1000 so as to realize motor overheat protection It supports various encoders such as differential encoder Multiple encoder types open collector encoder resolver UVW encoder and SIN COS encoder It supports the operation of frequency inverter parameters and Advanced background t ji virtual oscillograph function by which the state of frequency software l j inverter can be monitored key panel Control terminals RUN Running command giving A cin Serial communication port You can switch between these giving in various ways There are 10 kinds frequency giving digital setting analog es voltage setting analog current setting pulse setting and serial Frequency giving ee communication port setting RUN You can switch between these giving in various ways Auxiliary frequency giving There are 10 kinds auxiliary frequency giving It cani implement tiny tuning of auxiliary frequency and frequency synthesis 2 Product Information EM11 User s Manual Item Specifications RUN Input terminal Standard 6 digital input DI terminals one of which supports up to 50 kHz high speed pulse input 2 analog input AI terminals one of which only supports 0
217. power class higher power class MtO Change the selection of the motor via switchover p Perform motor switchover after Err41 jterminal during running of the frequency fault during mei the frequency inverter stops running PERE 1 The encoder parameters are set l Set the encoder parameters incorrectly properly ae mige Err42 2 The motor auto tuning is not 2 Perform the motor auto tuning Panie i ee performed 3 Set the detection parameters 3 The detection parameters of too large correctly based on the actual speed deviation are set incorrectly situation 1 The encoder parameters are set l Set the encoder parameters incorrectly properly Motor Err43 2 The motor auto tuning is not 2 Perform the motor auto tuning over speed performed 3 Set the over speed detection 3 The over speed detection parameters are set incorrectly parameters correctly based on the actual situation 7 Fault Diagnosis and Solution EM11 User s Manual Fault Name Display Possible Causes Solutions 1 Check the temperature sensor Motor 1 The cabling of the temperature sensor S and eliminate the cabling overheat Err45 becomes loose an 2 The motor temperature is too high 2 Lower the carrier frequency or adopt other heat radiation Measures 1 Check that the motor parameters Initial position Err51 1 The motor parameters are not toojare set correctly and whether the fault deviation based
218. r it is necessary to de rate the frequency inverter Please contact our company for technical support 1 2 12 Some special usages If wiring that is not described in this manual such as common DC bus is applied please contact the agent or our company for technical support EM11 User s Manual 1 Safety Information and Precautions 1 2 13 Disposal The electrolytic capacitors on the main circuits and PCB may explode when they are burnt Poisonous gas is generated when the plastic parts are burnt Please treat them as industrial waste 1 2 14 Adaptable Motor The standard adaptable motor is adaptable four pole squirrel cage asynchronous induction motor For other types of motor select a proper frequency inverter according to the rated motor current If user uses inverter for permanent magnet synchronous motor please contact my company for technical support The cooling fan and rotor shaft of non variable frequency motor are coaxial which results in reduced cooling effect when the rotational speed decreasing If variable speed is required add a more powerful fan or replace it with variable frequency motor in applications where the motor overheats easily The standard parameters of the adaptable motor have been configured inside the frequency inverter It is wn till necessary to perform motor auto tuning or modify the default values based on actual conditions Otherwise the running result and protection performance will be
219. rally you needn t perform correction in the applications Ideal target voltage indicates the theoretical output voltage of the frequency inverter Measured voltage indicates the actual output voltage value measured by instruments such as the multimeter 5 10 Group b9 Operation Panel and Display Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 STOP RESET key enabled only in operation panel control 1 STOP RESET key enabled in any operation mode 0 MF K key disabled 1 Switchover between operation panel b9 00 STOP RESET key function control and remote command control R terminal or communication b9 01 MF K Key function selection 2 Switchover between forward rotation and reverse rotation 3 Forward JOG 4 Reverse JOG MF K key refers to multifunctional key You can set the function of the MF K key by using this parameter You can perform switchover by using this key both in stop or running state 0 ME K key disabled This key is disabled 1 Switchover between operation panel control and remote command control terminal or communication You can perform switchover from the present command source to the operation panel control local operation If the present command source is operation panel control this key is invalid 2 Switchover between forward rotation and reverse rotation 76 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes 5 Description of Function Codes EM
220. rameter is used to enable the frequency inverter safety protection If it is set to 1 the frequency inverter does not respond to the run command after power on for example an input terminal is ON before power on The frequency inverter responds only after the run command is cancelled and becomes valid again In addition the frequency inverter does not respond to the run command valid from fault reset of the frequency inverter The run protection can be disabled only after the run command is cancelled one time In this way the motor will not automatically startup to avoid unexpected dangerous conditions for these startup commands from power on and fault reset b2 31 0 0min 6500 0 min 0 0 min 5 4 Group b3 Input Terminals The EM11 provides six digital input DI terminals DI6 can be used for high speed pulse input and two analog input AI terminals The optional extension card provides another six DI terminals DI7 to D112 and one AI terminal AI3 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b3 00 DI1 function selection 1 Forward RUN FWD Standard b3 01 DI2 function selection 4 Forward JOG FJOG Standard b3 02 DI3 function selection 9 Multi function terminal 4 Standard b3 03 DIA fimction selection 12 clear to zero of UP and DOWN setting Standard terminal keypad b3 04 DIS function selection E Terminal 1 for acceleration dece
221. rameters The Group d1 function codes are only valid for motor 1 vector control It is invalid for motor 2 parameters or motor V F control Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Speed Torque control 0 Speed control d1 00 selection 1 Torque control 0 It is used to select the frequency inverter s control mode speed control or torque control The EM11 provides DI terminals with two torque related functions function 21 Torque control prohibited and function 20 Speed control Torque control switchover The two DI terminals need to be used together with d1 00 to implement speed control torque control switchover If the DI terminal set with function 20 Speed control Torque control switchover is OFF the control mode is determined by d1 00 If the DI terminal set with function 20 is ON the control mode is reverse to the value of d1 00 However if the DI terminal with function 21 Torque control prohibited is ON the frequency inverter is fixed to run in the speed control mode Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Speed loop dl 01 proportional gain 0 01 10 00 0 30 1 Kp1 ai o2 Speed loop integral 9 91 10 008 0 50s time 1 Til Switchover frequency d1 03 A 0 00 d1 06 5 00 Hz Speed loop d1 04 proportional gain 0 01 10 00 0 20 2 KP2 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Speed loop integral d1 05 01s 10 time 2 Ti2 0 01s 10
222. ration time of simple PLC Segment 1 0 3 Acceleration deceleration C2 23 time of simple PLC Segment 10 0 3 C2 06 Running time of simple PLC Segment 2 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h Running time of simple PLC Segment 11 C2 24 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h C2 07 Acceleration deceleration time of simple PLC Segment 2 0 3 Acceleration deceleration C2 25 time of simple PLC Segment 11 0 3 Running time of simple C2 26 PLC Segment 12 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h 97 98 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Acceleration deceleration C2 27 time of simple PLC 0 3 0 Segment 12 Running time of simple C2 28 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h PLC Segment 13 s h st sh Acceleration deceleration C2 29 time of simple PLC 0 3 0 Segment 13 Running time of simple C2 30 K PLC Segment 14 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h Acceleration deceleration C2 31 time of simple PLC 0 3 0 Segment 14 Running time of simple C2 32 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h PLC Segment 15 s h s h s Acceleration deceleration C2 33 time of simple PLC 0 3 0 Segment 15 C2 34 Time unit of simple PLC 0 s second 0 running 1 h hour 5 17 Group C3 Swing Frequency Fixed Length and Count The swing frequency functi
223. requency of the frequency inverter helping to reduce the motor noise avoiding the resonance of the mechanical system and reducing the leakage current to earth and interference generated by the frequency inverter If the carrier frequency is low output current has high harmonic wave and then the motor will increase power loss and temperature rising If the carrier frequency is higher the power loss and temperature rising of the motor will decline However the frequency inverter will have an increasing in power loss temperature rising and interference Adjusting the carrier frequency will exert influences on the aspects listed in the following table Table 6 1 Influences of carrier frequency adjustment Carrier frequency Low gt High Motor noise Large Small Output current Bad gt Good Motor temperature High gt Low Frequency inverter Low gt High Leakage current Small gt Large External radiation Small gt Large interference 114 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual The factory setting of carrier frequency varies with the frequency inverter power If you need to modify the carrier frequency note that if the set carrier frequency is higher than factory setting it will lead to an increase in temperature rise of the frequency inverter s heatsink In this case you need to de rate the frequency inverter Otherw
224. restored when factory fault setting is done Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b0 12 Preset frequency 0 00 maximum frequency b0 13 50 00 Hz If the frequency source is digital setting or terminal UP DOWN the value of this parameter is the initial frequency of the frequency inverter digital setting Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b0 13 Maximum frequency 50 00 3000 00 Hz 50 00 Hz When the frequency source is AI pulse setting DI6 or Multi segment speed the 100 of input corresponds to the value of this parameter The output frequency of the EM11 can reach up to 3000 Hz To take both frequency reference resolution and frequency input range into consideration you can set the number of decimal places for frequency reference in b0 11 Ifb0 11 is set to 1 the frequency reference resolution is 0 1 Hz In this case the setting range of b0 13 is 50 0 to 3000 0 Hz If b0 11 is set to 2 the frequency reference resolution is 0 01 Hz In this case the setting range of b0 13 is 50 00 to 300 00 Hz Note After the value of b0 11 is modified the frequency resolution of all frequency related function codes change accordingly Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Set by b0 15 1 ATI Source of frequency upper 2 AI2 aio limit a 3 AI3 0 4 Pulse setting DI6 5 Communication setting It is used to set the source of the frequency upper limit inc
225. ring the frequency inverter start and stop process 0 Linear acceleration deceleration The output frequency increases or decreases in linear mode The EM11 provides four groups of acceleration deceleration time which can be selected by using multi function DI terminals b3 00 to b3 11 1 S curve acceleration deceleration A The output frequency increases or decreases along the S curve This mode is generally used in the applications where start and stop processes are required relatively smooth such as elevator and conveyor belt The b0 23 and b0 24 respectively define the time proportions of the start segment and the end segment 2 S curve acceleration deceleration B In this curve the rated motor frequency fb is always the inflexion point of S curve This mode is usually used in applications where acceleration deceleration is required at the speed higher than the rated frequency A Output frequency Hz Setting frequency fset Rated frequency fb gt 0 p0 23 i b0 24 Diagram 5 2 S curve acceleration deceleration B diagram Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 00s 650 00s b0 25 2 ES E Model b0 21 Acceleration time 1 0 0s 6500 0s b0 25 1 dependent 0s 65000s b0 25 0 44 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 00s 650 00s b0 25 2 ks yl Model b0 22 Deceleration time 1 0 0s 6500 0s b0 25 1
226. rmanent magnetic synchronous motor Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit Motor 1 control mode selection Ten s digit Motor 2 control mode selection 0 Sensor less vector control SVC 1 Closed loop vector control VC b0 01 Motor control mode 2 V F control 0 Hundred s digit Thousand s digit reserved Ten thousand s digit Motor selection 0 Motor 1 1 Motor 2 Unit s digit and Ten s digit is to select motor 1 and motor 2 control mode 0 Sensor less vector control SVC It indicates open loop vector control and is applicable to high performance control applications such as machine tool centrifuge wire drawing machine and injection molding machine One frequency inverter can operate only one motor 1 Closed loop vector control VC It is applicable to high accuracy speed control or torque control applications such as high speed paper making machine crane and elevator One Frequency inverter can operate only one motor An encoder must be installed at the motor side and a PG card matching the encoder must be installed at the frequency inverter side 2 Voltage Frequency V F control It is applicable to applications with low requirements or applications where one frequency inverter operates multiple motors such as fan and pump Note If vector control is used motor auto tuning must be performed because the advantages of vector control can only be utilized after correct motor parameters are obt
227. rol Circuit Terminals Main Circuit Terminals TPP P E Rf Sas Ths Ua Vin Wha ornon MaF MoTTe Grounding Diagram 3 7 EM11 Series terminal distribution diagram 3 Installation of Frequency Inverter EM11 User s Manual 3 8 Sketch and Description of Main Circuit Terminals 3 8 1 Function and description of Main Circuit Terminals 3 8 1 1 Main Circuit Terminals Sketch of single phase 220V model Including model Single phase 220V EM11 G1 d75 EM11 G1 2d2 P PB P E L1 L2 Um Vez Wrs p l Ri POWE Terminal symbol Function description P PB Connecting terminals of braking resistor P P Input terminals of DC power E Grounding terminal L10 L2 Single phase AC power input terminals UmiD V O Wrs Three phase AC power output terminals 3 8 1 2 Main Circuit Terminals Sketch of Three phase 220V 380V Small Power Standard Models Including model Three phase 220V EM11 G2 d75 EM11 G2 7d5 Three phase 380V EM11 G3 d75 P3 1d5 EM11 G3 015 P3 018 P PB P E Ri Sa2 Taa Umi Viz Wrs Loo POWER MOTOR Terminal symbol Function description P PB Connecting terminals of braking resistor P P Input terminals of DC power E Grounding terminal R0 S o T s Three phase AC power input terminals U
228. rol board of power on damaged Appendix I EM11 User s Manual 133 Appendix I Modbus communication protocol EMI lIseries of inverter provides RS485 communication interface and adopts MODBUS communication protocol User can carry out centralized monitoring through PC PLC to get operating requirements And user can set the running command modify or read the function codes the working state or fault information of frequency inverter by Modbus communication protocol I About Protocol This serial communication protocol defines the transmission information and use format in the series communication and it includes master polling or broadcasting format master coding method and the content includes function code of action transferring data and error checking The response of slave is the same structure and it includes action confirmation returning the data and error checking etc If slave takes place the error while it is receiving the information or cannot finish the action demanded by master it will send one fault signal to master as a response II Application Methods The frequency inverter will be connected into a Single master Multi slave PC PLC control net with RS4835 bus as the communication slave III Bus structure 1 Hardware interface The 485 and 485 terminals on frequency inverter are the communication interfaces of Modbus 2 Topological mode It is a Single m
229. rol circuit terminals Table 3 4 Description of control circuit terminals Type en Dea Terminal function description Prterhal ae aay supply to external unit Maximum 10V GND 10V power supply Generally it provides power supply to external potentiometer with resistance range of 1 kKO 5KQ Power External Provide 24 V power supply to external unit Generally it Supply 24V COM 24V power provides power supply to DI DO terminals and external supply sensors Maximum output current 200 mA External Connect to 24 V by default J4 power supply When DI1 DI6 need to be driven by external signal J4 input terminal must switch to be OFF status AII GND Analog input 1 Input voltage range DC OV 10 V terminal 1 _ 2 Input Impedance 22 kQ ae Analog input Put range DC OV 10V OmA 20mA decided by AI2 GND terminal 2 jumper J5 on the control board 2 Impedance 22 kQ voltage input 500 Q current input DI ai input D2 Digital input f a l 2 1 Optical coupling isolation compatible with dual polarity DB Digital input input a 3 2 Input Impedance 2 4 kQ hunt D4 ie input 3 Voltage range for level input 9V 30 V DIS ar input High Speed Besides features of DII DIS and it can be used for HDI Pulse Input high speed pulse input Terminal Maximum input frequency 50 kHz Analog Voltage or current output is decided by jumper J6 AO1 GND output Output voltage range
230. roup Al User Defined Function Codes EMC Electromagnetic compatibility 6 1 Definition occ eeeeeeeeeee 6 2 EMC Standard Description 6 3 EMC Guide eee 6 3 1 Harmonic Effect 6 3 2 Electromagnetic Interference and Installation Precautions 6 3 3 Handling method for the interferences of the surrounding equipment on the inverter 2 6 3 4 Handling method for the interferences of frequency inverter on the surrounding equipment 126 6 3 5 Leakage current and handling riein neient i e ea e ea TEE aa a E E A R a EE iE 126 Table of Contents EM11 User s Manual Il 6 3 6 Precautions for Installing EMC input filter at the input end of power supply 7 Fault Diagnosis and Solution 7 1 Fault Alarm and Countermeasures 7 2 Common Faults and Solutions Appendix I Modbus communication protocol I About Protocol IL Application Methods III Bus structure Appendix II Function Code Table Warranty Agreement IV EM11 User s Manual 1 Safety Information and Precautions 1 Safety Information and Precautions In this manual the notices are graded based on the degree of danger A Danger Indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in severe personal injury or even death A Warning Indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in personal injury or property damage Read this manual carefully so that you have a thorough understanding Installation commissioning or maintenance
231. rpm 65535rpm dependen o 0 001 Q 65 535 Q frequency inverter 40 05 Stator resistance powers 55 kW Model 0 asynchronous motor 0 0001 Q 6 5535 Q frequency inverter dependent power gt 75 kW 0 001 Q 65 535 Q Frequency inverter 40 06 Rotor resistance powers 55 kW Model q asynchronous motor 0 0001 Q 6 5535 Q Frequency inverter dependent power gt 75 kW 40 07 Leakage inductive 0 01mH 655 35 mH Frequency inverter Model 0 reactance asynchronous powers 55 kW dependent 68 EM11 User s Manual Appendix II Code Parameter Name Setting range Default _ Property motor 0 001mH 65 535 mH Frequency inverter power gt 75 kW Mutual inductive 0 1mH 6553 5 mH Frequency inverter d0 08 reactance asynchronous Senet A Mode o fastor 0 01mH 655 35 mH Frequency inverter dependent power gt 75 kW 0 01A d0 02 Frequency inverter power d0 09 No load current lt 55 kW Model T asynchronous motor 0 1A to d0 02 Frequency inverter power dependent gt 75 kW 0 001 Q 65 535 Q Frequency inverter 40 15 Stator resistance powers 55 kW Model T synchronous motor 0 0001 Q 6 5535 Q Frequency inverter dependent power gt 75 kW 0 01 mH 655 35 mH Frequency inverter 40 16 Shaft D inductance power lt 55 kW Mode T synchronous motor 0 001 65 535 mH Frequency inverter dependent power gt 75 kW 0 01 mH 655 35 mH Frequency inverter 40 17 Shaft Q inductance power lt 5
232. s motor complete d3 30 jeca auto tuning 0 o selection 11 Synchronous motor with load auto tuning 12 Synchronous motor no load auto tuning Group d4 Motor 2 Vector Control Parameters 44 00 Speed Torque control 0 Speed control 0 5 selection 1 Torque control mode d4 o1 SPeed loop proportional l6 41 19 99 0 30 0 gain 1 Kp1 T d4 o2 SPeed loop integral time 01S 10 005 0 50s 0 1 Til d4 03 Switchover frequency 1 0 00Hz d4 06 5 00 Hz 0 d4 o4 SPeed loop proportional 10 0110 00 0 20 i gain 2 Kp2 7 Speed loop integral time d4 05 0 01s 10 00 1 00 2 Ti2 s s I d4 06 Switchover frequency 2 d4 03 maximum output frequency 10 00 Hz a 44 07 Speed loop integral 0 Integral separated disabled 0 0 property 1 Integral separated enabled d4 08 ASR input filtering time 0 000s 0 100s 0 000s 0 d4 09 ASR output filtering 0 000s 0 100s 0 000s 0 74 EM11 User s Manual Appendix II Code Parameter Name Setting range Default _ Property time Excitati tl d4 10 50anon current o0P lo 30000 2000 0 proportional gain Excitati tl d4 11 50anon curent 100P l0 30000 1300 0 integral gain T tl d4 12 Ordue current ooP 0 30000 2000 0 proportional gain T tl d4 13 onque current o0P 0 30000 1300 0 integral gain 0 d4 16 1 ATI Motor driven torque 2 AD d4 14 upper limit source in gt AG 0 o speed control mode 4 Pulse setting DI6 5 Communication setti
233. synchronous motor manufacturer Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default do 19 Freoder pulsesper i 33767 1024 revolution This parameter is used to set the pulses per revolution PPR of ABZ or UVW incremental encoder In VC mode the motor cannot run properly if this parameter is set incorrectly 101 102 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 ABZ incremental encoder 1 Resolver d0 20 Encoder type 2 UVW incremental encoder 0 3 Reserved 4 Wire saving UVW encoder The EM11 supports multiple types of encoder Different PG cards are required for different types of encoder Select the appropriate PG card for the encoder used Any of the five encoder types is applicable to synchronous motor Only ABZ incremental encoder and resolver are applicable to asynchronous motor After installation of the PG card is complete set this parameter properly based on the actual condition Otherwise the frequency inverter cannot run properly Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default A B phase sequence l0 Forward d0 21 of ABZ incremental 0 1 Reserve encoder This parameter is valid only for ABZ incremental encoder d0 20 0 and is used to set the A B phase sequence of the ABZ incremental encoder It is valid for both asynchronous motor and synchronous motor The A B phase sequence can be obtained t
234. t by the preset frequency b0 12 frequency If the command source is set to terminal control b0 02 r 1 this terminal is used to perform switchover between Terminal 1 for Command i terminal control and operation panel control 18 source switchover Pa ai If the command source is set to communication control b0 02 2 this terminal is used to perform switchover between communication control and operation panel control 5 It is used to perform switchover between terminal control and Terminal 2 for Command Lon communication control If the command source is terminal 19 Jsource switchover ee control the system will switch over to communication control after this terminal becomes ON This terminal enables the frequency inverter to switch over between speed control and torque control When this terminal Speed control Torque control j 20 switchover becomes OFF the frequency inverter runs in the mode set in d1 00 When this terminal becomes ON the frequency inverter switches over to the other control mode 21 Torque control prohibited The Frequency inverter is prohibited from torque control and enters the speed control mode PID is invalid temporarily The frequency inverter maintains the 22 PID pause present frequency output without supporting PID adjustment of frequency source After this terminal becomes ON the integral adjustment 23 PID integral pause function pauses However the proportional and differentiation
235. t lt Time t Zero current detection delay time B4 32 Diagram 5 17 Zero current detection Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b4 33 Over current output threshold 0 0 300 0 rated motor current 200 0 b4 34 delay time Over current output detection 0 00s 600 00s 0 10s If the output current of the frequency inverter is equal to or higher than the over current threshold and the duration exceeds the detection delay time the corresponding DO becomes ON The output over current detection function is shown in the following figure 66 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes Output current A Output overcurrent threshold B4 33 gt Time t Output overcurrent detection signal oni i gt i i Time t Output overcurrent detection delay time B4 34 Diagram 5 18 Output over current detection Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b4 35 Any current reaching 1 0 0 100 0 rated motor current 100 0 litude of t b4 36 e A a 0 0 100 0 rated motor current 3 0 reaching 1 b4 37 Any current reaching 2 0 0 100 0 rated motor current 100 0 Amplitude of t b4 38 ac E ea 0 0 100 0 rated motor current 3 0 reaching 2 If the output current of the frequency inverter is within the positive and negative amplitudes of any current reaching detection value the corresponding DO becomes ON The EM11 provi
236. t V F voltage d5 08 0 0 100 09 0 09 3 V3 o VIF sli ti d5 09 Sap compensation 9 0 200 0 0 0 o coefficient 45 10 oscillation Suppression 0 100 0 0 gain 0 Digital setting d5 13 1 All 2 AI2 3 AI3 45 12 Voltage pote for V F 4 rue setting DIS 0 0 separation 5 Multi function 6 Simple PLC 7 PID 8 Communication setting Note 100 0 corresponds to the rated motor voltage Voltage digital setti d5 13 tage er im MS l0 V rated motor voltage OV a for V F separation se 0 0s 1000 0s d5 14 Voltage rise ae OnE Note It indicates the time for the voltage 0 0s a separation p rising from 0 V rated motor voltage Group d6 Control Optimization Parameters d6 00 Model Carrier frequency 0 5kHz 15 0 kHz one a dependent d6 01 DPWM switch swncnev 0 00H2 15 00 Hz 12 00Hz D frequency upper limit d6 02 0 Asynch dulati PWM modulation mode Dobe see bag ee ain eo 0 0 1 Synchronous modulation d6 03 eee ae 0 No a jjustment wi 1 Yes temperature d6 04 0 Random PWM invalid Random PWM depth 1 10 Random PWM carrier frequency 0 a depth 177 Appendix IT EM11 User s Manual Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property d6 05 Dead zone 0 No compensation compensation mode 1 Compensation mode 1 1 a selection 2 Compensation mode 2 d6 06 0 SVC mode 0 SVC mode selection 1
237. t at stop 2 Zero speed running 2 having output at stop 3 Preset count value reached Designated count value reached Length reached Frequency level detection FDT1 output Frequency level detection FDT2 output Frequency reached 4 5 6 PLC cycle complete 7 8 9 20 Frequency reached 21 Frequency 2 reached 22 Current 1 reached 23 Current 2 reached 24 Module temperature reached 25 Timing reached 50 EM11 User s Manual Appendix II Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property b4 06 DO3 function extend b4 07 DO4 function extend b4 08 DOS function extend b4 09 DO6 function extend 26 Zero current state 27 Output current exceeded limitation 28 Lower voltage state output 29 Frequency inverter overload pre warning 30 Motor overheat pre warning Motor overload pre warning 32 off load 33 AI larger than AI2 34 AI input exceeded limitation 35 Alarm output all faults 36 Present running time reached 37 Accumulative power on time reached we 38 Accumulative running time reached FMR ON delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s FMR OFF delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s Relay 1 ON delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s Relay 1 OFF delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s DO1 ON delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s DO1 OFF delay time 0 0s 3000 0s 0 0s DO
238. t maximum input b5 18 Jump ea 100 0 100 0 0 0 b5 43 AI bree 0 00 10 00s 0 10s corresponding settin i i Jump am ae 7 T ut psg4 Jump s e H AR EA ne b5 19 pe coondine sattine f 0 0 100 0 0 5 Fa eee Corresponding seting ump amplitude o input v E b5 20 AI2 minimum input 0 00 V 10 00 V 0 00 V SES corresponding setting SE eee b5 21 Corresponding setting of AI2 100 00 100 0 0 0 The AI terminals AI1 to AI3 of EM11 all support the corresponding setting jump function which fixes the g se o 0 0 minimum input AI input corresponding setting at the jump point when AI input corresponding setting jumps around the 65 22 Second point input value of 0 00 V 10 00 V 2 50V jump range AI2 F or example AIl input voltage fluctuation around 5 00V and the amplitude range is 4 90V 5 10V AI1 minimum input 69 70 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes 0 00V corresponds to 0 00 and maximum input 10 00V corresponds to 100 0 The detected AI1 input corresponding setting varies between 49 0 and 51 0 If you set jump point b5 18 to 50 0 and jump amplitude b5 19 to 1 0 then frequency inverter obtained AIl input corresponding setting is fixed to 50 0 eliminating the fluctuation effect 5 7 Group b6 Pulse analog output terminals Code Parameter Name Default b6 00 FMP function selection 0 b6 01 AO1 output function selection 0 b6 02 AO2 output function sele
239. t sto i terminal becomes ON If the frequency inverter is in the stop state the P stop terminal becomes OFF 2 Zero speed running 2 If the output frequency of the frequency inverter is 0 the terminal having output at stop becomes ON In the state of stop the signal is still ON The terminal becomes ON when the count value reaches the value set 3 Set count value reached in C3 08 4 Designated count value The terminal becomes ON when the count value reaches the value set reached in C3 09 The terminal becomes ON when the detected actual length exceeds the 5 Length reached value set in C3 05 When simple PLC completes one cycle the terminal outputs a pulse 6 PLC cycle complete sonal with width of 250ms Frequency level detection 3 es je 7 FDT1 output Refer to the descriptions of b4 22 and b4 23 8 Frequency level detection Refer to the descripti fb4 24 and b4 25 FDT2 output efer to the descriptions of b4 24 and b4 25 9 Frequency reached Refer to the descriptions of b4 26 20 Frequency 1 reached Refer to the descriptions of b4 27 and b4 28 21 Frequency 2 reached Refer to the descriptions of b4 29 and b4 30 22 Current 1 reached Refer to the descriptions of b4 35 and b4 36 23 Current 2 reached Refer to the descriptions of b4 37 and b4 38 24 Module temperature If the heatsink temperature of the inverter module b9 07 reaches the reached set module temperature threshold b4 39 the terminal becomes ON fete If the timing functio
240. t voltage must slowly rise to the rating by using the voltage regulator 2 8 Warranty Items 1 Warranty only refers to frequency inverter 2 Under normal use if there is any failure or damage our company is responsible for the warranty within 12 months Leave factory date is subjected to the S N on the frequency inverter nameplate or the contract When over 12 months reasonable maintenance fee will be charged 3 During 12 months if the following situation happens certain maintenance fee will be charged a The users don t follow the manual stated makes the frequency inverter damaged b The damage caused by fire flood and abnormal voltage c The damage caused by using the frequency inverter for abnormal functions d The relevant service fee is calculated according to the manufacturer s standard if there is contract then it carries out subject to the contract 2 9 Selection Guide of braking component Table 2 5 is the recommended value of braking resistor users can select the different resistance value and power according to the actual situation but the resistance value must not be less than the recommended value in the table and the power can be bigger The selection of braking resistance need to be confirmed according to the power that the motor generated in the practical application systems and is relevant to the system inertia deceleration time the energy of the potential energy load needs customers to choose ac
241. tation dead zone time Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Running mode when set 0 Run at frequency lower limit b2 17 frequency lower than 1 Stop 0 frequency lower limit 2 Run at zero speed It is used to set the frequency inverter running mode when the set frequency is lower than the frequency lower limit The EM11 provides three running modes to satisfy requirements of various applications Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b2 18 Droop control 0 00Hz 10 00 Hz 0 00 Hz This function is used for balancing the workload allocation when multiple motors are used to drive the same load The output frequency of the frequency inverters decreases as the load increases You can reduce the workload of the motor under load by decreasing the output frequency for this motor implementing workload balancing among multiple motors Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Disabled b2 19 i iori Terminal JOG priority 1 Enabled 0 It is used to set whether terminal JOG is priority If terminal JOG is priority the frequency inverter switches to terminal JOG running state when there is a terminal JOG command during the running process of the frequency inverter Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 62 20 Setting power on time reach 0 65000 h Oh threshold If the accumulative power on time b9 08 reaches the value set in this parameter the corresponding D
242. te and STOP RESET Stop Reset perform the reset operation when it is in the fault state The functions of this key are restricted by b9 00 MF K Multi function Perform function switchover according to the setting of b9 01 Menu mode Perform switchover between menu modes according to the setting QUICK selection of A0 08 The default is a menu mode 4 2 Viewing and Modifying Function Codes The operation panel of the EM11 adopts three level menu The three level menu consists of function code group Level I function code Level II and function code setting value level III as shown in the following figure 4 Operation and display EM11 User s Manual 33 Change parameter Change functional Change the value of roup code functional code A V PRG ESC a ENTER ENTER m D H 50 00 b0 b0 08 050 00 PRG ESC PRG ESC PRG ESC Level 0 menu Level I menu LevelII menu ENTER Level III menu Diagram 4 3 Operation procedure on the operation panel Instruction We can return to level II menu from Level III menu by pressing PRG or ENTER The difference between them is After you press ENTER the system saves the parameter setting first and then goes back to Level II menu and shifts to the next function code After you press PRG the system does not save the parameter setting but directly returns to Level II menu and remains at the present functio
243. te more than the standard Modbus protocol s for details refer to communication data structure of appendix Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default hens aera 0 0 01A reading current 101A resolution It is used to confirm the unit of current value when the communication reads the output current 5 12 Group bb Fault and Protection Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 P type bb 00 G P type selection ype 1 1 G type This parameter is used to display the delivered model and cannot be modified 0 Applicable to variable torque load fan and pump with rated parameters specified 1 Applicable to constant torque general load with rated parameters specified Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default r over 0 Disabled bb 01 Motor overload isable n protection selection 1 Enabled bb o2 Motoroverload 02010 00 1 00 protection gain bb 01 0 The motor overload protective function is disabled The motor is exposed to potential damage due to overheating A thermal relay is suggested to be installed between the frequency inverter and the motor bb 01 1 The frequency inverter judges whether the motor is overloaded according to the inverse time lag curve of the motor overload protection The inverse time lag curve of the motor overload protection is 220 x bb 02 x rated motor current if the load remains at this value for one minute the
244. the corresponding bit to 1 and set b9 04 to the hexadecimal equivalent of this binary number Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Load speed displa b9 05 peec SPAY 0 0001 6 5000 1 0000 coefficient This parameter is used to adjust the relationship between the output frequency of frequency inverter and the load speed For details see the description of b9 06 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 77 78 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 0 decimal display Number of decimal b9 06 places for load speed display 1 1 decimal display 2 2 decimal display 3 3 decimal display b9 06 is used to set the number of decimal places for load speed display The following gives an example to explain how to calculate the load speed Assume that b9 05 Load speed display coefficient is 2 000 and b9 06 is 2 2 decimal places When the running frequency of the frequency inverter is 40 00 Hz the load speed is 40 00 x 2 000 80 00 display of 2 decimal places If the frequency inverter is in the stop state the load speed is the speed corresponding to the set frequency namely setting load speed If the set frequency is 50 00 Hz the load speed in the stop state is 50 00 x 2 000 100 00 display of 2 decimal places Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
245. the frequency inverter runs in reverse direction 96 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes n Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual Output frequency C1 14 Bz c1 15 i gt Time t C2 02 C2 07 DO or relay output 250 ms pulses Diagram 5 28 Simple PLC when used as frequency source Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit Record of power failure 0 no record after power off c2 01 Simple PLC record 1 record after power off 00 selection Ten s digit Record of stopping 0 no record after stopping l record after stopping PLC record of power failure indica es that the frequency inverter memorizes the PLC running stage and running frequency before power failure and frequency inverter will continue to run from the memorized stage after it is powered on again If the unit s digit is set to 0 the frequency inverter restarts the PLC process after it is powered on again PLC record of stopping indicates that the frequency inverter records the PLC running stage and running frequency of stop and frequency inverter will continue to run from the recorded stage after power on again If the ten s digit is set to 0 the frequency inverter will restarts the PLC process after it power on again Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Running time of simple C2 08 PLC Segment 3 0 0s h 6553 5s h
246. the frequency inverter will automatically calculate the following parameters of motor Motor Parameter d0 05 Stator resistance asynchronous motor Motor 1 d0 06 Rotor resistance asynchronous motor d0 07 Leakage inductive reactance asynchronous motor d2 05 Stator resistance asynchronous motor Motor 2 d2 06 Rotor resistance asynchronous motor d2 07 Leakage inductive reactance asynchronous motor Description of synchronous motor identification As the EM11 driven synchronous machine system needs the feedback signal from encoder so uses need to correctly set the parameter of encoder before identification During the identification process of synchronous system rotation movement is needed The best identification method is no load dynamic running identification if the condition is not allowed with load dynamic identification is workable 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes 5 1 Group b0 Basic Function Parameters Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit Motor 1 selection Ten s digit Motor 2 selection b0 00 Motor type selection 0 AC asynchronous motor 0 1 Permanent magnetic synchronous motor Unit s digit 0 select Motor 1 as AC asynchronous motor l select Motor 1 as Permanent magnetic synchronous motor Ten s digit 0 select Motor 2 as AC asynchronous motor l select Motor 2 as Pe
247. the frequency offset in b0 08 for superposition to the X and Y operation result flexibly satisfying various requirements Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Frequency offset of auxiliary frequency source of X and Y b0 08 0 00 Hz maximum frequency b0 13 0 00 Hz 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual This parameter is valid only when the frequency source is set to X and Y operation The final frequency is obtained by adding the frequency offset set in this parameter to the X and Y operation result Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit Binding keypad command to following frequency source 0 No binding 1 Frequency source by digital setting 2 AIl 3 AI2 4 AI3 5 Pulse setting DI6 6 Multi function 7 Simple PLC 8 PID 0 9 Communication setting Ten s digit Binding terminal command to Binding command source to frequency source b0 09 frequency source 0 9 same as unit s digit Hundred s digit Binding communication command to frequency source 0 9 same as unit s digit Thousand s digit Automatically running binding to frequency source 0 9 same as unit s digit It is used to bind the three running command sources with the nine frequency sources facilitating to implement synchronous switchover For details on the frequency sources see the description of b0 03 Main frequency source X selection Different ru
248. the register after all the bytes of the message have been applied is the CRC value When the CRC is appended to the message the low order byte is appended first followed by the high order byte unsigned int cre_chk_value unsigned char data_value unsigned char length unsigned int crc_value 0xFFFF int i while length crc_value data_value for i 0 i lt 8 i if cre_value amp 0x0001 t crce_value cre_value gt gt 1 0xa001 else t cre_value cre_value gt gt 1 j return cre_value Definition of communication parameter address Read and write function code parameters Some functional code is not changed only for the manufacturer use The group number and mark of function code is the parameter address for indicating the rules High level bytes Group AO AF GroupA0 A2 Groupb0 bC Groupb0 bF Group C0 C6 Groupd0 d6 70 7F Group U Low level bytes 00 to FF For example b0 03 address indicates to 0xA303 Note Group U Only for reading parameter cannot be changed parameters some parameters cannot be changed during operation some parameters regardless of what kind of state the inverter in the parameters cannot be changed Change the function code parameters pay attention to the scope of the parameters units and relative instructions F TEN one Inquiry address When Function code group Communication inquiry address heed f Communication modifies RAM A0 A2 0xA000 0xA2FF 0x
249. these 5 parameters according to common standard Y series asynchronous motor If it is impossible to perform motor auto tuning onsite manually set the values of these parameters according to data provided by the motor manufacturer Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 001 Q 65 535 Q fi invert T lt 55 kW Stator resistance frequency es Rte Model d0 15 0 0001 Q 6 5535 Q frequency inverter power gt 75 synchronous motor dependen kW 0 01 mH 655 35 mH frequency inverter power lt 55 do 16 Shaft D inductance kW Model synchronous motor dependen 0 001 65 535 mH Frequency inverter power gt 75 kW 0 01 mH 655 35 mH frequency inverter power lt 55 40 17 Shaft Q inductance kW Model synchronous motor 0 001 mH 65 535 mH frequency inverter power gt 75 dependent kW Back EMF Model d0 18 S 0 1V 6553 5 V e synchronous motor dependen The d0 15 d0 18 are synchronous motor parameters These parameters are unavailable on the nameplate of most synchronous motors and can be obtained by means of Synchronous motor no load auto tuning Through Synchronous motor with load auto tuning only the encoder phase sequence and installation angle can be obtained Each time Rated motor power d0 00 or Rated motor voltage d0 01 is changed the frequency inverter will automatically modify the values of d0 15 d0 18 You can also directly set the parameters based on the data provided by the
250. thout frost deposit EM11 G3 5d5 P3 7d5 400W gt 900 standard instructions 4 Avoid direct sunlight EM11 G3 7d5 P3 011 500W gt 650 5 Keep away from flammable explosive and corrosive gas and liquid EM11 G3 011 P3 015 800W gt Ba 6 No dust floating fiber and metal particles EM11 G3 015 P3 018 1000W gt 320 7 Install on the place without strongly vibration And the vibration should be not over 0 6G Especially pay EM11 G3 018 P3 022 1300W gt 250 attention to far away from the punching machine etc EM11 G3 022 P3 030 1500W gt 220 Builti Add B to th 8 Keep away from electromagnetic interference source uilt in as B to the EM11 G3 030 P3 037 2500W gt 16Q option model EM11 G3 037 P3 045 3 7kW 16 00 3 2 Installation direction and space EM11 G3 045 P3 055 4 5 kW 16Q In order to not affect the service life of frequency inverter and reduce its performance note for its Built in as Add B to the EM11 G3 055 P3 075 5 5kW gt 80 option moki installation direction and space and correctly fasten it EM11 G3 075 P3 090 7 5 kW gt 8Q A j A EM11 G3 090 P3 110 4 5 kWx2 gt 80x2 ZZA Z EM11 G3 110 P3 132 5 5 kWx2 gt 80x2 Eternal EMBU ae Z EM11 G3 132 P3 160 6 5 kWx2 gt 80x2 TIT a 8 EM11 G3 160 P3 200 16kW gt 2 50 cage DE
251. time of simple PLC Segment 5 0 3 o C2 14 Running time of simple PLC Segment 6 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h C2 15 Acceleration deceleratio n time of simple PLC Segment 6 0 3 C2 16 Running time of simple PLC Segment 7 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h C2 17 Acceleration deceleratio n time of simple PLC Segment 7 0 3 C2 18 Running time of simple PLC Segment 8 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h C2 19 Acceleration deceleratio n time of simple PLC Segment 8 0 3 C2 20 Running time of simple PLC Segment 9 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h C2 21 Acceleration deceleratio n time of simple PLC Segment 9 0 3 C2 22 Running time of simple PLC Segment 10 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h C2 23 Acceleration deceleratio n time of simple PLC Segment 10 0 3 C2 24 Running time of simple PLC Segment 11 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h C2 25 Acceleration deceleratio n time of simple PLC Segment 11 0 3 C2 26 Running time of simple PLC Segment 12 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h C2 27 Acceleration deceleratio n time of simple PLC Segment 12 0 3 C2 28 Running time of simple PLC Segment 13 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h C2 29 Acceleration deceleratio n time of simple PLC Segment 13 0 3 C2 30 Running time of simple PLC Segment 14 0 0s h 6553 5s h 0 0s h C2 31 Accel
252. ting may cause too large speed overshoot and overvoltage fault may even occur when the overshoot drops Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 1 07 Speed loop integral 0 Integral separation disabled property 1 Integral separation enabled d1 10 Excitation c rrent 0 30000 2000 loop proportional gain dit1 Excitation curent 0 30000 1300 loop integral gain Torque current loop proportional gain dl 12 0 30000 2000 105 06 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default a1 13 Torque current looP lo 30000 1300 integral gain These are current loop PI parameters for vector control These parameters are automatically obtained through Asynchronous motor complete auto tuning or Synchronous motor no load auto tuning and need not be modified The dimension of the current loop integral regulator is integral gain rather than integral time Note that too large current loop PI gain may lead to oscillation of the entire control loop Therefore when current oscillation or torque fluctuation is great manually decrease the proportional gain or integral gain here Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 d1 16 M 1 ATI otor running torque 2 AD dl 14 upper limit source in 0 3 AI3 speed control mode 4 Pulse setting DI6 5 Communication setting 0 d1 17 E 1 All raking torque
253. tion guide Set this parameter to 11 and press RUN key Then the frequency inverter starts with load auto tuning 104 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual 12 Synchronous motor no load auto tuning If the synchronous motor can be disconnected from the load no load auto tuning is recommended which will achieve better running performance compared with with load auto tuning During the process of no load auto tuning the frequency inverter performs with load auto tuning firstly and then accelerates to 80 of the rated motor frequency with the acceleration time set in b0 21 The frequency inverter keeps running for a certain period and then decelerates to stop with the deceleration time set in b0 22 Before performing no load auto tuning properly set the motor type motor nameplate parameters of b0 00 and d0 00 d0 04 Encoder type d0 20 and Encoder pulses per revolution d0 19 and Number of pole pairs of resolver d0 28 first The frequency inverter will obtain motor parameters of d0 15 d0 18 encoder related parameters of d0 21 d0 24 and vector control current loop PI parameters of d1 10 d1 13 by no load auto tuning Action guide Set this parameter to 12 and press RUN key Then the frequency inverter starts no load auto tuning Note Motor auto tuning can be performed only in operation panel mode 5 19 Group d1 Motor 1 vector control pa
254. tion setting corresponding to 0 32767 p6 03 Maximum FMP output 6 01 kHz 50 00 kHz 50 00kHz J frequency b6 04 AOI offset coefficient 100 0 100 0 0 0 0 b6 05 AO1 gain 10 00 10 00 1 00 0 b6 06 AO2 offset coefficient 100 0 100 0 0 00 0 b6 07 AO2 gain 10 00 10 00 1 00 0 Group b7 Virtual DI VDD Virtual DO VDO b7 00 VDI function selection 0 49 0 0 b7 01 VDI2 function selection 0 49 0 Q b7 02 VDI3 function selection 0 49 0 Q b7 03 VDI4 function selection 0 49 0 0 b7 04 VDIS5 function selection 0 49 0 0 Unit s digit VDII 0 Valid decided by state of VDOx 1 Valid decided by b7 06 Ten s digit VDI2 0 1 same as VDI1 b7 05 VDI state setting mode Hundred s digit VDI3 00000 o 0 1 same as VDI1 Thousand s digit VDI4 0 1 same as VDI1 Ten thousand s digit VDIS 0 1 same as VDI1 155 Appendix IT EM11 User s Manual Code Parameter Name Setting range Default Property Unit s digit VDI 0 Invalid 1 Valid Ten s digit VDI2 0 1 same as VDI1 b7 06 VDI state setting Hundred s digit VDI3 00000 o 0 1 same as VDI1 Thousand s digit VDI4 0 1 same as VDI1 Ten thousand s digit VDIS 0 1 same as VDI1 Function selection for ad All used aspDI_ 0P d 0 Function selection for pee A2 usedasDi 0P i 0 Function selection for b7 09 0 49 0 AI3 used as DI 0 Unit s digit AI1
255. tively from right to left Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 43 DO f riction state visual display It displays whether the DO functions 41 59 are valid The display format is similar to U0 42 The 7 segment LEDs display functions 41 48 49 56 and 57 59 respectively from right to left Code Parameter Name Display Range 0 45 Phase Z signal counting 20 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes It displays the phase Z counting of the present ABZ or UVW encoder The value increases or decreases by every time the encoder rotates a round forwardly or reversely You can check whether the installation of the encoder is normal by viewing U0 45 Code Parameter Name Display Range Present setting U0 46 frequency 100 00 100 00 Present running U0 47 100 00 100 00 frequency It displays the present setting frequency and running frequency 100 00 corresponds to the frequency inverter s maximum frequency b0 13 Code Parameter Name Display Range Frequency inverter running state U0 48 0 65535 It displays the running state of the frequency inverter The data format is listed in the following table Bito stop 1 forwarder running Bitl 2 reverse running U0 48 Bit 2 0 constant speed Bit3 l acceleration 2 deceleration Bit4 0 Normal DC bus voltage 1
256. to 0 the dormant and wakeup functions are disabled When the dormant function is enabled if the frequency source is PID whether PID operation is performed in the dormant state is determined by C0 27 In this case select PID operation enabled in the stop state C0 27 1 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default wont n 0 Disabled b2 28 Timing function 1 Enabled 0 0 b2 30 1 All 2 AI2 b2 29 Timing duration source 3 AB 0 100 of analog input corresponds to the value of b2 30 b2 30 Timing duration 0 0min 6500 0 min 0 0 min These parameters are used to implement the frequency inverter timing function If b2 28 is set to 1 the frequency inverter starts to time at startup When the set timing duration reached the frequency inverter stops automatically and meanwhile the corresponding DO outputs ON signal The frequency inverter starts timing from 0 0min each time it starts up and the remaining timing duration can be checked by U0 20 The timing duration is set in b2 29 and b2 30 in unit of minute 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default This time running time reached threshold If the present running time reaches the value set in this parameter the corresponding DO outputs ON signal indicating that present running time is reached Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 No b2 32 Startup protection 1 Yes 0 This pa
257. to Y the auxiliary frequency source Y is used in the same way as the main frequency source X refer to b0 03 When the auxiliary frequency source is used for operation frequency source is X and Y operation pay attention to the following aspects 1 If the auxiliary frequency source Y is digital setting the preset frequency b0 12 does not take effect You can directly adjust the set main frequency by pressing keys A and on the operation panel or using the UP DOWN function of input terminals 2 Ifthe auxiliary frequency source is analog input AI1 AI2 and AI3 or pulse setting 100 of the input corresponds to the range of the auxiliary frequency Y set in b0 05 and b0 06 3 Ifthe auxiliary frequency source is pulse setting it is similar to analog input Note The main frequency source X and auxiliary frequency source Y must not use the same channel That is b0 03 and b0 04 cannot be set to the same value in case of confusion Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b0 05 Selection of auxiliary frequency 0 Relative to maximum frequency 0 Y range 1 Relative to main frequency X b0 06 Range of auxiliary frequency Y 0 150 100 40 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes If X and Y operation is used b0 05 and b0 06 are used to set the adjustment range of the auxiliary frequency source You can set the auxiliary frequency to be relative to either maximum fr
258. to the frequency set in b0 26 figure 6 3 is the acceleration deceleration time diagram If this parameter is set to 1 the acceleration deceleration time is related to the set frequency If the set frequency changes frequently the motor s acceleration deceleration also changes 5 2 Group b1 Start Stop Control Parameters Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Direct start b1 00 Start mode 1 Rotational speed tracking restart 0 2 Pre excited start AC asynchronous motor 0 Direct start If the DC braking time is set to 0 the frequency inverter starts to run from the startup frequency If the DC braking time is not 0 the frequency inverter performs DC braking first and then starts to run from the startup frequency It is applicable to small inertia load application and to where the motor is likely to rotate at startup 1 Rotational speed tracking restart The frequency inverter judges the rotational speed and direction of the motor firstly and then starts at the tracked frequency Such smooth start has no impact on the rotating motor It is applicable to the restart of instantaneous power failure of large inertia loads To ensure the perfect performance of rotational speed tracking restart please set the motor parameters correctly 2 Pre excited start asynchronous motor It is valid only for asynchronous motor and used for building the magnetic field before the motor runs For pre excited current and pre
259. to voltage regulation AVR It can keep constant output voltage automatically when the mains voltage fluctuation EM11 User s Manual 2 Product Information Item Specifications Overvoltage Over current stall control The current and voltage are limited automatically during the running process so as to avoid frequently tripping due to overvoltage over current Rapid current limit function It can auto limit running current of frequency inverter to avoid frequently tripping Torque limit and control Excavator characteristics It can limit the torque automatically and prevent frequently over current tripping during the running process Torque control can be implemented in the VC mode High performance Control of asynchronous motor and synchronous motor are implemented through the high performance current vector control technology Instant power off not stop The load feedback energy compensates the voltage reduction so that the frequency inverter can continue to run for a short time Rapid current limit To avoid frequently over current faults of the frequency inverter Virtual I O Five groups of virtual DI DO can realize simple logic control Timing control Time range 0 0 6500 0 minutes Two motors can be switched by two groups of motor Individualized Multi motor switchover E parameters functions Multi
260. tput current declines to below bb 07 the frequency inverter continues to accelerate decelerate bb 07 over current stall protective current is used to select the current protection value of over current stall 82 EM11 User s Manual 5 Description of Function Codes function This function will be carried out by frequency inverter when the current exceeds bb 07 This value is the percentage of motor rated current bb 06 over current stall gain is used to adjust the over current suppression capacity of the frequency inverter The larger the value is the greater the over current suppression capacity will be In condition of no over current occurrence should set bb 06 to a small value For small inertia load the value should be small Otherwise the system dynamic response will be slow For large inertia load the value should be large Otherwise the suppression result will be poor and over current fault may occur If the over current stall gain is set to 0 the over current stall function is disabled Output Current A Overcurrent stall protective current gt Time t Output Frequency A Hz Setting frequency gt Time t Constant speed process Deceleration process Acceleration process Diagram 5 23 Diagram of the over current stall protection function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default aoe a bs ciate 3 4 0 Disabled et Short circult to groun 1
261. ty Unit s digit Modbus baud ratio 0 300 BPS 1 600 BPS 2 1200 BPS bA 01 Baud ratio setting 3 2400 BPS 5 o 4 4800 BPS 5 9600 BPS 6 19200 BPS 7 38400 BPS 0 No check data format lt 8 N 2 gt 1 Even parity check data format lt 8 E 1 gt bA 02 Modbus Data format 2 Odd Parity check data format lt 8 0 1 gt 0 o 3 No check data format lt 8 N 1 gt Valid for Modbus 0 247 0 Broadcast address bA 03 Broadcast address Valid for Modbus 1 a 0 20 ms bA 04 Modbi del 2 eee cuneate Only valid for Modbus ig I 0 0s invalid bA 05 Communication timeout 0 1s 60 0s 0 0s i Valid for Modbus Modbus protocol data Unit s digit Modbus protocol bA 06 transmission format 0 Non standard Modbus protocol 1 o selection Standard Modbus protocol Communication reading 0 0 01A bA 07 current resolution 0 1A I Group bb Fault and Protection Setting bb 00 G P type selection P YPe 1 0 G type bb 01 Moter overload 0 Disabled 0 7 protection selection Enabled 0 Mot load bb 02 oor overoad 10 20 10 00 1 00 D protection gain Mot load z bb 03 Otor ONES 150 100 80 0 pre warning coefficient bb 04 Overvoltage stall gain 0 100 0 0 O It tall bb 05 NS ere 20 150 130 o protective voltage bb 06 Over current stall gain 0 100 20 0 bb 07 Overcwrentstall 1 0 200 150 o protective current Protection of EAA 0 Disabled bb 08 short circuit to ground 1 Enabled o after power on bb 09 Fault auto reset times 0 99 0 0
262. ulse maximum input B5 00 B5 02 Diagram 5 20 The relationship between pulse input and setting value Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 5 05 AIl input voltage lower limit 0 00 V b5 06 310V of protection b5 06 AIl input voltage upper limit b5 05 10 00 V 6 80 V of protection These two parameters are used to set the limits of the input voltage to provide protection on the frequency inverter When the AIl input is larger than the value of b5 06 or smaller than the value of b5 05 the corresponding DO becomes ON indicating that AI1 input exceeds the limit Every analog input has five setting points to facilitate the setting of the AI curve Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b5 07 Allinput minimum value 0 00 V b5 15 0 00 V b5 08 Corresponding setting of AIl 100 00 100 0 0 0 minimum input 65 09 Second point input value of 0 00 V 10 00 V 2 50V All Corresponding setting of b5 10 second point input value of 100 0 100 0 25 0 All b5 11 Third point input value of AI1 0 00 V 10 00 V 5 00V b5 12 Corresponding setting of third _ 00 0 100 0 50 0 point input value of All psig oe R R value of 0 00 V 10 00 V 7 50V b5 14 Corresponding setting of 100 0 100 0 75 0 68
263. unction codes uA0 00 0 z 4 ompany address A1 20 User defined function User visible function codes uA0 00 0 code 20 7 e Company Name Contact Person Al 21 Vseedefined Mnetion User visible function codes uA0 00 0 Customer code 21 Information Al 22 Vssrdetined fonction User visible function codes uA0 00 0 Post Code Tel code 22 Z A1 23 User defined function User visible function codes uA0 00 0 code 23 Product model defined functi A1 24 e ane User visible function codes uA0 00 0 code 24 a i Body barcode Attach here Al 25 Uset detined function User visible function codes uA0 00 0 Product code 25 information defined functi ne 7 A1 26 User defined function User visible function codes uA0 00 0 Name of agent code 26 defined functi n A1 27 Cadena function User visible function codes uA0 00 code 27 7 A User defined functi Maintenance time and content Al 28 a i 2 H my User visible function codes uA0 00 0 Fail e ailure A1 29 User defined function User visible function codes uA0 00 0 information code 29 A1 30 Dar User visible function codes uA0 00 O Maintenance personnel User defined functi n Al 31 es oe 31 me User visible function codes uA0 00 0 code 181
264. unction is influenced by the DI function 24 Reverse PID action direction Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default C0 05 eae 0 65535 1000 feedback range This parameter is a non dimensional unit It is used for PID setting display U0 15 and PID feedback display U0 16 Relative value 100 of PID setting feedback corresponds to the value of C0 05 If C0 05 is set to 2000 and PID setting is 100 0 the PID setting display U0 15 is 2000 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default co 06 Proportional gain 0010 0 20 0 KP1 C0 07 Integral time TI 0 01s 10 00s 2 00s C0 08 Differential time TD1 0 000s 10 000s 0 000s C0 06 Proportional gain Kp1 It decides the regulating intensity of the PID regulator The higher the Kp1 is the larger the regulating intensity is The value 10 00 indicates when the deviation between PID feedback and PID setting is 100 0 the adjustment amplitude of the PID regulator on the output frequency reference is the maximum frequency C0 07 Integral time Til It decides the integral regulating intensity The shorter the integral time is the larger the regulating intensity is When the deviation between PID feedback and PID setting is 100 0 the integral regulator performs continuous adjustment for the time Then the adjustment amplitude reaches the maximum frequency C0 08 Differential time Td1 It decides the regulating intensity of the PID re
265. upper f gt Ar dl 15 limit source in speed 0 3 AI3 control mode 4 Pulse setting DI6 5 Communication setting Digital setting of dl 16 motor running torque 0 0 200 0 150 0 limit ar 17 Disttal setting of 14 0 200 0 150 0 braking torque limit In the speed control mode the maximum output torque of the frequency inverter is restricted by d1 14 If the torque upper limit is analog pulse or communication setting 100 of the setting corresponds to the value of d1 16 and 100 of the value of d1 16 corresponds to the frequency inverter rated torque For details on the AI1 AI2 and AI3 setting see the description of the AI curves For details on the pulse setting see the description of b5 00 b5 04 Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default diig Motor eu SP 599 200 100 For SVC it is used to adjust speed stability accuracy of the motor When the motor with load runs at a very low speed increase the value of this parameter when the motor with load runs at a very fast speed decrease the value of this parameter For VC it is used to adjust the output current of the frequency inverter with same load 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default PM field weakening 0 Invalid field weakening dl 21 mode of synchronous 1 Direct calculation 1 motor 2 Automatic adjustment PM field weakening dl 22 depth of
266. uring the process of complete auto tuning the frequency inverter performs static auto tuning first and then accelerates to 80 of the rated motor frequency within the acceleration time set in b0 21 The frequency inverter keeps running for a certain period and then decelerates to stop with deceleration time set in b0 22 Before performing complete auto tuning properly set the motor type motor nameplate parameters of b0 00 and d0 00 d0 04 Encoder type d0 20 and Encoder pulses per revolution d0 19 first The frequency inverter will obtain motor parameters of d0 05 d0 09 A B phase sequence of ABZ incremental encoder d0 21 and vector control current loop PI parameters of d1 10 d1 13 by complete auto tuning Action guide Set this parameter to 2 and press RUN key Then the frequency inverter starts complete auto tuning 11 Synchronous motor with load auto tuning It is applicable to site where the synchronous motor cannot be disconnected from the load During with load auto tuning the motor rotates at the speed of 10 RPM Before performing with load auto tuning properly set the motor type and motor nameplate parameters of b0 00 and d0 00 d0 04 first By with load auto tuning the frequency inverter obtains the initial position angle of the synchronous motor which is a necessary prerequisite of the motor s normal running Before the first use of the synchronous motor after installation motor auto tuning must be performed Ac
267. us modulation is generally used at high output frequency which helps improve the output voltage quality At low output frequency 100 Hz or lower synchronous modulation is not required This is because ratio of carrier frequency to output frequency is still high and asynchronous modulation is more superior at such low running frequency Synchronous modulation takes effect only when the running frequency is higher than 85 Hz If the frequency is lower than 85 Hz asynchronous modulation is always valid Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Carrier frequency 0 No d6 03 j i i 1 adjustment with 1 Yes temperature It is used to set whether the carrier frequency is adjusted based on the temperature The frequency inverter automatically reduces the carrier frequency when detecting that the heatsink temperature is high The frequency inverter restores the carrier frequency to the set value when the heatsink temperature becomes normal This function is used to reduces the overheat alarms Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Random PWM invalid d6 04 Random PWM depth oo meas 0 1 10 Random PWM carrier frequency depth The setting of random PWM depth can make the motor shrill noise to soft and reduce the electromagnetic interference to other equipments If this parameter is set to 0 random PWM is invalid Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Dead zone 0 No c
268. wever too high reverse rotation frequency is prohibited in some applications and C0 18 is used to determine the reverse rotation frequency upper limit Diagram 5 26 PID parameters switchover Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit Integral separated 0 Invalid 1 Valid C0 15 PID integral property Ten s digit Whether to stop integral operation when the 00 output reaches the limit 0 Continue integral operation 1 Stop integral operation Integral separation If integral separation is set to valid and the DI is defined as function 22 PID integral pause In this case only proportional and differential operations take effect If integral separation is set to invalid no matter whether the DI set with function 22 PID integral pause is ON or not integral separation remains invalid Stop integral After the output has reached to maximum or minimum limit in PID operation we can select to stop the integral operation or not If we select to stop it may help to reduce the PID overshoot Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default C0 19 PID deviation limit 0 0 100 0 0 0 If the deviation between PID feedback and PID setting is smaller than the value of C0 19 PID control stops The small deviation between PID feedback and PID setting will make the output frequency stabilize which is effective for some closed loop control applications Code
269. which will bring you a new using experience EM11 series frequency inverter is a continuable and vigorous product and we will offer customized service to our customers Before unpacking please check carefully Whether the nameplate model of frequency inverter are consistent with your order ratings The box contains the frequency inverter user manual Whether the frequency inverter is damaged during transportation If you find any omission or damage please contact us or your local supplier immediately First time Use For the users who use this product for the first time read the manual carefully If in doubt concerning some functions or performances contact the technical support personnel to ensure correct use Due to the continuous improvement of frequency inverter this document will be updated without prior notice EM11 series Frequency inverter complies with the following international standards All products have passed the CE certification IEC EN61800 5 1 2003 Variable speed electric drive system safety requirements IEC EN61800 3 2004 Variable speed electric drive system Part 3 The Electro Magnetic Compatibility EMC Standards of Product and its specific testing methods Note There are all parameters list integrated at appendix II First time use this inverter please do motor auto tuning according to d0 30 page 104 Table of Contents EM11 User s Manual I 2 we Installation of
270. y 50 00 Hz detection value 2 Any fi hi b4 30 ny lrequency reacamg 0 0 100 0 maximum frequency 3 0 detection amplitude 2 If the output frequency of the frequency inverter is within the positive and negative amplitudes of the any frequency reaching detection value the corresponding DO becomes ON The EM11 provides two groups of any frequency reaching detection parameters including frequency detection value and detection amplitude as shown in the following figure 5 Description of Function Codes EM11 User s Manual 65 Output frequency A Hz Any frequency reaching Frequency reaching detection amplitude f gt l Time t Any frequency reaching A Detection signal DO or relay i i ON on OFF OFF OFE Time t Diagram 5 16 Any frequency reaching detection Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default b4 31 Zero current detection level 0 0 100 0 rated motor current 5 0 Z t detection del b432 20O Cen ne 0 008 600 00s 0 10s If the output current of the frequency inverter is equal to or less than the zero current detection level and the duration exceeds the zero current detection delay time the corresponding DO becomes ON The zero current detection is shown in the following figure Output current A Zero current detection level B4 31 Zero current A detection signal Time t ON gt g

Manual - JB CNC & Linear Components

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Manual - JB CNC &amp; Linear Components

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Manual - JB CNC & Linear Components